WEB FULL MANUAL

1M23Z07702

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction6

Monitor LED display24

Support and Service

Stick Control

24

Application, Export, andModification

66Compliance Information Statement7
Definitions of Symbols

7

Safety Precautions (do not operate
without reading)
8
Features 

Stick Control: Airplane Example 25
Stick Control: Helicopter Example

26


12

Contents and Technical
Specifications

12Transmitter Controls

13Transmitter's Antenna15

Transmitter Lipo Battery
LT2F2000B

16

Stick Control: Multicopter Example
27
Stick Adjustment

28

Stick Mode

29

microSD card

30

Connector/Plug

31

Receiver Nomenclature

32

Receiver's Antenna Installation

35

Safety precautions when you installreceiver/servos
36

How to turn transmitter power ON/
OFF
18

S.BUS/S.BUS2 Installation

37

Touch Display

S.BUS2 System

38

HOME/EXIT and U.MENU/MON19

S.BUS2 Sdevice setting

39

Lock Display

20

Home Screen

40

RF off mode

20

Link Procedure 

41

Switch (SA-SH)

21

After Setting42

Volume22

Model ID43

Slider

22

Range Testing Your R/C System 44

Digital Trims (T1-T4)

23

Model basic setting procedure

19

2 →

45

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Servo Connection by Model Type 50

System type

77

Airplane/Glider

50

Trim setting

79

Helicopter

54

Throttle cut80

Multicopter

54

Idle down

81

SYSTEM MENU

55

Swash ring (Heli only)

82

Display

56

Swash (Heli only, except H-1)

83

Sound volume

57

Stick alarm

85

System timer

57

Timer

86

H/W setting58

Function name88

Battery

59

Telemetry system

89

Sensor91

Range check

59(→44)

S.Bus servo

60

Telemetry

94

Information

63

Telemetry:Receiver [Battery]

95

LINKAGE MENU

64

Telemetry:Receiver [Ext-batt]

96

Servo monitor

65

Telemetry:Temperature

97

Model select

66

Telemetry:RPM sensor

98Model type69

Telemetry:Altitude

99

Servo reverse

71

Telemetry:Altitude [Variometer] 100

End point

72

Telemetry:Voltage [Battery] 103

Servo speed

73

Telemetry:Voltage [Ext-batt]

104

Sub-trim

73

Telemetry:GPS [Distance]

105

Function

74

Telemetry:GPS [Speed]

107

Fail safe

76

Telemetry:GPS [Altitude,
Variometer, Position]

108

3 →



GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry:Servo sensor [Current]109

Camber mixing

134

Airbrake → ELE136

Camber flap → ELE137

Telemetry:Current sensor [Current]
111

Rudder → Aileron

138

Rudder → Elevator

139

Telemetry:Airspeed sensor[Airspeed]

Butterfly

140

Trim mix 1/2143

Snap roll (Airplane only)

144

Air brake (Airplane only)

145

Gyro

146

Ailevator

148

Acceleration

149

Motor

150

Telemetry:Servo sensor[Temperature, Angle]

110

112

Tele. setting (Telemetry setting) 113
Trainer

115

Warning setting118

User menu setting

119

Data reset

120

MODEL MENU (Airplane/Glider)
121
Condition select 

122V-tail

151

AFR

124

Winglet

152

Dual rate

125

MODEL MENU (Helicopter)

153

Prog, mixes (Program mixing)

126

Condition select

154

Aileron differential

128

AFR

156

Flap setting

129

Dual rate

157

AIL → Camber flap

130

Prog, mixes (Program mixing)

158

AIL → Brake flap

131

Pitch curve

160

Aileron → Rudder132

Throttle curve

163

Elevator → Camber

133

Acceleration

165

4 →

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Throttle hold

166

Govenor Expert

167

MODEL MENU (Multicopter) 203

Throttle mixing

168

Condition select

204

Pitch → Needle

169

AFR

206

Dual rate207

Prog, mixes (Program mixing)

208

Gyro

209

Common Operations used infunction setup screen

211

Operations value setting

211

Operations related to flight
conditions

211

Swash mixing

Pitch → Rudder (Revolution mixing)
170
Gyro (Helicopter)

171

Governor

173

Gyro setting CGY755 CGY760R175
Wired connection:Advanced setting

176

201

Wireless tunings

177Home Screen

178

Basic Menu

180

S.BUS Basic Menu

181

Swash Basic

182

Curve setting operation

214

Flight Tune (Aileron/Elevator Basicsettings)
186

Switch selection method

218

PC Port222

Rudder Basic

189

Govenor Basic

190

Expert Menu

193

Rudder Expert

194

Operations related to fine tuning VR212


Operations related to servo speed

213

RealFlight Connection method 222
Updating

224

T14SG/FX-22/T12K ⇒ T16IZ
CONVERSION

226

Flight Tune Expert (Aileron/Elevator
Expert settings)
197
Swash Detail

198
5 →

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTSINTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing a Futaba® FASSTest-2.4 GHz* T16IZ series digital proportional R/C system. This system is
extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make the best use of your systemand to fly safely, please read this manual carefully. If you have any difficulties while using your system, please consult
the manual, our online Frequently Asked Questions (on the web pages referenced below), your hobby dealer, or the
Futaba Service Center.
*FASSTest: Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology extend system telemetry
Due to unforeseen changes in production procedures, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice.
Support and Service: It is recommended to have your Futaba equipment serviced annually during your hobby’s “offseason” to ensure safe operation.

In North America

Please feel free to contact the Futaba Service Center for assistance in operation, use and programming. Please be
sure to regularly visit the T16IZ Frequently Asked Questions web site at www.futabausa.com/. This page includes
extensive programming, use, set up and safety information on the T16IZ radio system and is updated regularly. Anytechnical updates and US manual corrections will be available on this web page. If you do not find the answers to yourquestions there, please see the end of our F.A.Q. area for information on contacting us via email for the most rapid andconvenient response.
Don’t have Internet access? Internet access is available at no charge at most public libraries, schools, and other publicresources. We find internet support to be a fabulous reference for many modelers as items can be printed and saved for
future reference, and can be accessed at any hour of the day, night, weekend or holiday. If you do not wish to accessthe internet for information, however, don’t worry. Our support teams are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central
time to assist you.
For Service :FUTABA Corporation of America
2681 Wall Triana Hwy Huntsville, AL 35824, U.S.A.
Phone:1-256-461-9399 FAX:1-256-461-1059
https://www.futabausa.com/
E-mail: service@futabaUSA.com

Please visit www.futabausa.com to create and submit a service
ticket for warranty, repair, or check up work

Outside North America

Please contact your Futaba importer in your region of the world to assist you with any questions, problems or service
needs. Please recognize that all information in this manual, and all support availability, is based upon the systems
sold in North America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region’s support center forassistance.

Application, Export, and Modification

1. This product may be used for unmanned aerial vehicle use. It is not intended for use in any application other thanunmanned aerial vehicle control. The product is subject to regulations of the Ministry of Radio/Telecommunications
and is restricted under Japanese law to such purposes.
2. Exportation precautions:(a) When this product is exported from the country of manufacture, its use is to be approved by the laws governing
the country of destination which govern devices that emit radio frequencies. If this product is then re-exported to othercountries, it may be subject to restrictions on such export. Prior approval of the appropriate government authorities may
be required. If you have purchased this product from an exporter outside your country, and not the authorized Futaba
distributor in your country, please contact the seller immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met.
(b) Use of this product with anything other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations,and an application for export approval must be submitted. This equipment must not be utilized to operate equipment
other than radio controlled models.
3. Modification, adjustment, and replacement of parts: Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized modification,
adjustment, and replacement of parts on this product. Any such changes may void the warranty.

6 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Compliance Information Statement (for U.S.A.)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
(3)RF Radiation Exposure Statement (For T16IZ)
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.This transmittermust not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
RF Radiation Exposure Statement (For R7108SB)
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body.
The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:
FUTABA Corporation of America
2681 Wall Triana Hwy Huntsville, AL 35824, U.S.A.
Phone:1-256-461-9399 FAX:1-256-461-1059
https://www.futabausa.com/
E-mail: service@futabaUSA.com
CAUTION:To assure continued FCC compliance:
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the grantee of this device could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Compliance Information Statement (for Canada)This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includinginterference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmittermust not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
French:Cet appareil radio est conforme au CNR d’Industrie Canada. L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux
deux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à
accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement
du dispositif.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition au rayonnement du CI établies pour un environnement noncontrôlé. Cet émetteur ne doit pas être co-situé ou fonctionner conjointement avec une autre antenne ou émetteur.

Declaration of Conformity (for EU)

Hereby, Futaba Corporation declares that the radio equipment type is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

http://www.rc.futaba.co.jp/english/dl/declarations.html

7 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Where to Fly

Flying Safety

We recommend that you fly at a recognized model airplane flying field. You can find model clubs and fields byasking your nearest hobby dealer, or, in the US, by contacting the Academy of Model Aeronautics.
The national Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA) has more than 2,500 chartered clubs across the country.
Through any one of them, instructor training programs and insured newcomer training are available. Contact the
AMA at the address or toll-free phone number below.
Academy of Model Aeronautics
5161 East Memorial Drive
Muncie, IN 47302
Tele. (800) 435-9262
Fax (765) 289-4248
or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org

Always pay particular attention to the flying field’s rules, as well as the presence andlocation of spectators, the wind direction, and any obstacles on the field. Be very careful
flying in areas near power lines, tall buildings, or communication facilities as there may beradio interference in their vicinity.

Precautions
Application, Export, and Modification Precautions.
1. This product is only designed for use with radio control models. Use of the product described in this instruction manual is limited toradio control models.
2. Export precautions:a) When this product is exported, it cannot be used where prohibited by the laws governing radio waves of the destination country.
b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations.
3. Modification, adjustment, and parts replacement:
Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized modification, adjustment, or replacement of parts on this product.

■ No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior permission.
■ The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
■ The contents of this manual should be complete, but if there are any unclear or missing parts please contact a Futaba Service
Center.
■ Futaba is not responsible for the use of this product by the customer.
■ Company and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company.

For safe use

Please observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this product at all times.
Meaning of Special Markings:
The parts of this manual indicated by the following marks require special attention from the standpoint of safety.
DANGER - Procedures which may lead to dangerous conditions and cause death/serious injury if not carried out properly.

WARNING - Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition or cause death or serious injury to the user if not carried out properly,or procedures where the probability of superficial injury or physical damage is high.
CAUTION - Procedures where the possibility of serious injury to the user is small, but there is a danger of injury, or physical damage, if
not carried out properly.

= Prohibited= Mandatory

WARNING: Always keep electrical components away from small children.

8 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Flying Precautions
WARNING

Never grasp the transmitter antenna while flying.
■ The transmitter output may drop drastically.

Always make sure that all transmitter stick movements operate all servos properly in the model prior toflight. Also, make sure that all switches, etc. function
properly as well. If there are any difficulties, do not use
the system until all inputs are functioning properly.
Never fly in range check mode.

For safety, fly so that the aircraft is visible at all times.
■ Flying behind buildings or other large structures will not only
cause you to lose sight of the aircraft, but also degrade the RF
link performance and cause loss of control.

From the standpoint of safety, always set the fail safe
function.
■ In particular, normally set the throttle channel to idle. For ahelicopter, set the throttle channel to maintain a hover.

■ In the dedicated range test range check mode, the transmitter
output range is reduced and may cause a crash.

When flying, always return the transmitter setup
screen to the Home screen.

While operating, never touch the transmitter with, orbring the transmitter near, another transmitter, a cellphone, or other wireless devices.

■ Erroneous input during ﬂight is extremely dangerous.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

Do not point the antenna directly toward the aircraft
during flight.
■ The antenna is directional and the transmitter output isweakest. (The strength of the radio waves is greatest from thesides of the antenna.)

Never fly on a rainy day, when the wind is strong, orat night.
■ Water could lead to failure or improper functionality and poor
control of the aircraft which could lead to a crash.

Never turn the power switch off during flight or while
the engine or motor is running.
■ Operation will become impossible and the aircraft will crash.
Even if the power switch is turned on, operation will not begin
until transmitter and receiver internal processing is complete.

Do not start the engine or motor while wearing theneck strap.
■ The neck strap may become entangled with the rotating
propeller, rotor, etc. and cause a serious injury.

Do not fly when you are physically impaired as it
could pose a safety hazard to yourself or others.
Do not fly at the following places:■ Near another radio control flying field.
■ Near or above people.
■ Near homes, schools, hospitals or other places where people
congregate.
■ Near high voltage lines, high structures, or communication
facilities.

When setting the transmitter on the ground during
flight preparations, do not stand it upright.

Always check the remaining capacity of the transmitter and receiver batteries before each flying session
prior to flight.
■ Low battery capacity will cause loss of control and a crash.

Always check operation of each control surface andperform a range test before each flying session. Also,
when using the trainer function, check the operation ofboth the teacher and student transmitter.
■ Even one incorrect transmitter setting or aircraft abnormality
can cause a crash.

Before turning on the transmitter:
1. Always move the transmitter throttle stick position to theminimum (idle) position.
2. Turn on the transmitter first and then the receiver.

When turning off the transmitter’ s power switch
after the engine or motor has stopped (state in which it
will not rotate again):
1. Turn off the receiver power switch.
2. Then turn off the transmitter power switch.
■ If the power switch is turned on/oﬀ in the opposite order, thepropeller may rotate unexpectedly and cause a serious injury.
■ Also always observe the above order when setting the fail safe
function.

When adjusting the transmitter, stop the engine except when necessary. In the case of a motor, disconnect
the wiring that allows it to continue operation. When
doing so, please exercise extreme caution. Ensure thatthe aircraft is secured and that it will not come into contact with anything or anyone. Ensure that the motor will
not rotate prior to making any adjustments.
■ Unexpected high speed rotation of the engine/motor may
cause a serious injury.

■ The transmitter may tip over, the sticks may move and thepropeller or rotor may rotate unexpectedly and cause injury.

Do not touch the engine, motor, or ESC during and
immediately after use.
■ These items may become hot during use.

9 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Battery and Charger Handling Precautions
DANGER

Do not recharge a battery that is damaged, deteriorated, leaking electrolyte, or wet.
Do not allow the charger or battery to become wet.

■ Do not use the charger when it or your hands are wet. Do not
use the charger in humid places.

Do not short circuit the battery.

Do not solder, repair, deform, modify, or disassemble
the battery and/or battery charger.

Do not drop the battery into a fire or bring it near a fire.

Do not charge and store the battery in direct sunlightor other hot places.
Do not charge the battery if it is covered with any object as it may become very hot.
Do not use the battery in a combustible environment.

■ The combustibles may could ignite ignite and cause an
explosion or ﬁre.

Always charge the battery before each flying session.

■ If the battery goes dead during ﬂight, the aircraft will crash.

Always use the charger with the specified power
supply voltage.

If the battery liquid should get in your eyes, do not
rub your eyes, but immediately wash them with tap water or other clean water and get treated by a doctor.
■ The liquid can cause blindness.

Temperature protection for battery charge:
Low temp. protection
High temp. protection

Temperature-10 ± 5 ° C
60 ± 5 ° C

1. Replacement of a battery with an incorrect type that can defeat asafeguard.
2. Disposal of a battery into fire or a hot oven, or mechanicallycrushing or cutting of a battery, that can result in an explosion.
3. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding
environment that can result in an explosion or the leakage offlammable liquid or gas.
4. A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure that may resultin an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas.

Insert the power cord plug firmly into the receptacle up to its base.
WARNING

Do not touch the charger and battery for any lengthof time during charging.

If the battery leaks liquid or generates an abnormalodor, immediately move it to a safe place for disposal.

■ Doing so may result in burns.

■ Not doing so may cause combustion.

Do not use a charger or battery that has been damaged.

If any abnormalities such as smoke or discoloration
are noted with either the charger or the battery, remove
the battery from the transmitter or charger and disconnect the power cord plug and do not use the charger.
■ Continued use may cause fire, combustion, generation of heat,or rupture.

Do not subject the batteries to impact.

■ Doing so may cause fire, combustion, generation of heat,rupture, or liquid leakage.

If the battery liquid gets on your skin or clothing, immediately flush the area with tap water or other cleanwater.
■ Consult a doctor. The liquid can cause skin damage.

After charging, disconnect the charger from the receptacle.

When recycling or disposing of the battery, isolate
the terminals by covering them with tape.
■ Short circuit of the terminals may cause combustion,
generation of heat or rupture.

Use and store the battery and battery charger in a secure location away from children.
■ Not doing so may cause electric shock or injury.
CAUTION

Do not fly with the USB AC adapter for charging connected.
Do not use the battery with devices other than thecorresponding transmitter.

Do not place heavy objects on top of the battery or
charger. Also, do not place the battery or charger in any
location where it may fall.
■ Doing so may cause damage or injury.

Do not store or use the battery where it is dusty or
humid.

■ Insert the power cord plug into the receptacle only after
eliminating the dust.

After the transmitter has been used for a long time,
the battery may become hot. Do not touch the battery
immediately.
■ Not doing so may cause a burn.

Do not bend or pull the cord unreasonably and do
not place heavy objects on the cord.
■ The power cord may be damaged and cause combustion,
generation of heat, or electric shock.

10 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

micro SD Card (Commercial Product) Handling Precautions
WARNING*Read the instruction manual supplied with the microSD card for details.

Never disassemble or modify the microSD card.

Do not use the microSD card where it may be exposed to water, chemicals, oil, or other fluids.

Do not bend, drop, scratch or place heavy objects on
the microSD card.

■ Doing so may cause a ﬁre or electric shock by short circuiting.

If smoke or an abnormal odor emanates from the card,
immediately turn off the transmitter power.
CAUTION

Do not insert foreign matter into the transmitter card slot.

Since the microSD card is an electronic device, be
careful of static electricity.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

■ Static electricity may cause erroneous operation or othertrouble.

Do not expose the card to shock and vibration and do
not remove the card from the card slot while data is being written or read.

Do not use the microSD card near radio and television sets, audio equipment, motors and other equipment that generates noise.

■ The data may be damaged or lost.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

Do not store the microSD card in the following places:● Recorded data

・Where the humidity is high・Where the temperature difference is severe
・Where it is very dusty
・Where the card will be exposed to shock and vibration
・Near speakers and other magnetic devices

The data recorded on the microSD cardcannot be compensated regardless of thecontents or cause of the trouble or obstruction.
Futaba does not perform data restoration or
recovery work.

Storage and Disposal Precautions
WARNING

Keep wireless equipment, batteries, aircraft, etc.
away from children.
CAUTION

Do not store wireless devices in the following places:
・Where it is extremely hot (40℃ [104 ℉ ] or higher) or
cold (-10℃ [14 ℉ ] or lower)
・Where the equipment will be exposed to direct sunlight・Where the humidity is high・Where vibration is prevalent・Where it is very dusty
・Where the device may be exposed to steam and heat

When the device will not be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the transmitter and aircraft andstore them in a dry place where the temperature is between 0℃ and 25℃ [32 ℉ and 77 ℉ ].
■ Leaving batteries inside your model and radio when they are notbeing used for long periods will result in battery deterioration,liquid leakage and other damage.

Other Precautions
CAUTION

Do not directly expose plastic parts to fuel, oil, exhaust gas, etc.

Always use genuine Futaba products such as transmitter, receiver, servo, ESC, etc.

■ If left in such an environment, the plastic may be damaged.

■ Futaba is not responsible for damage sustained by combination
with parts other than Futaba Genuine Parts. Use the parts
specified in the instruction manual and catalog.

■ Since the metal parts of the case may corrode, always keepthem clean.

Join the Academy of Model Aeronautics.

■ The Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA) provides guidelines
and liability protection should the need arise.

11 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Features
FASSTest system
The T16IZ transmitter has adopted the bidirectional communication system "FASSTest". Data from the receiver can be checked inyour transmitter. FASSTest is a maximum 18 channels 2.4 GHz dedicated system.

Color touch screen LCD
T16IZ has an HVGA 4.3 inch, full-color, backlit LCD touch screen. The screen is transflective which enables both indoor andoutdoor visibility.

S.BUS2 system
By using the S.BUS2 system multiple servos, gyros and telemetry sensors are easily installed with a minimum amount of cables.

Model types
Multicopter. 8 swash types are available for helicopters. 7 wing types and 3 tail types are available for airplanes and gliders.
Functions and mixing functions necessary for each model type are set in advance at the factory.

Lithium-ion polymer battery
T16IZ is operated by a 7.4 V/2,000 mAh Lithium-ion polymer battery.
microSD card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not included)
Model data can be saved to a microSD card (SD:32MB-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB). When T16IZ transmitter software files are
released, the software can be updated by using a microSD card update.

Edit button
Two edit buttons are provided, and the operating screen can be immediately “Returned” to the HOME screen during operation.
Setting operation can be performed easily by combining this button with a touch sensor.

Vibration function
Selects a function that alerts the operator to various alarms by vibrating the transmitter in addition to sounding a buzzer.

Speech function
A function is equipped which allows the system to provide telemetry data audibly. This function can also be utilized withcommercially available earphones.

Contents and Technical Specifications• T16IZ Transmitter• R7108SB Receiver• LT2F2000B LiPo Battery(Specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice.)• USB Cable• Hex Key• Tx Strap• Short Manual*The contents may vary on the type of set.

Transmitter T16IZ(2-stick, 18-channel, FASSTest-2.4 GHz system)
Transmitting frequency: 2.4 GHz band
System: FASSTest 18CH/FASSTest 12CH/S-FHSS/T-FHSS/               FASST MULT(Europe is not supported)/FASST 7CH(Europe is not supported) switchable  Power supply: 7.4 V LT2F2000B LiPo battery
Frequency band: 2.4 GHz
RF power output : 100 mW EIRP

Receiver R7108SB(FASSTest-2.4 GHz system, Dual Antenna Diversity, S.BUS/S.BUS2 system)
Power requirement: 3.7 V-7.4 V battery or regulated output from ESC, etc. (*1)
Size: 0.98 x 1.86 x 0.56 in. (24.9 x 47.3 x 14.3 mm)
Weight: 0.42 oz. (12.0 g)
Frequency band: 2.4 GHz
RF power output:  25 mW EIRP(*1) When using ESCs make sure that the regulated output capacity meets your usage application.

Note: This set does not include a charger. Use a commercially available USB charger AC
adapter (USB-A type 5 V-2 A) or the Futaba optional USB AC adapter.
Note: The battery in the T16IZ transmitter does not arrive already attached to the battery
connector.  Please connect the battery connector before use.

12 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Transmitter Controls● SD card Slot

● Antenna● PC Port

The transmittercan be used as agame controller by
connecting it to acomputer with a USB
cable. (Some games
cannot be used.)Top● Monitor LED

Front● Right Dial (RD)● Left Dial (LD)● Switch
SA.SB.SE.SF● Switch
SC.SD.SG.SH● Stick● Stick

J3

J2
J4

J1
● Power Switch● Digital trim
T1-T4

● Hook● HOME/EXIT Button● Color LCD Touch Display

13 →● U.MENU/MON. Button（User menu/Servo monitor）

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

● Stick tension adjustment port

Back

● Right SliderRS● Left Slider
LS● Earpone
Jack● S.I/F Port（S.BUS setting）● Trainer port

● Battery cover● Kickstand● Charging Port

The angle when the transmitter isplaced can be changed by rotating
the swing handle and tightening
the screw.

Bottom● Charging LED

The LCD displays shown in this manual may vary from your own,
depending upon your model type. LCD displays may also vary as aresult of version upgrades or other changes.

14 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Transmitter's Antenna

As with all radio frequency transmissions, the strongest area of signal transmission is from the sides of
the transmitter's antenna. As such, the antenna should not be pointed directly at the model. If your flying
style creates this situation, easily move the antenna to correct this situation.

Rotating antenna
The antenna can be rotated 90 degrees and angles 90 degrees.
Forcing the antenna further than this can damage it. The
antenna is not removable.
Low power

1

High power

High power

If you fly with yourtransmitter facing
the model at theangle shown in theillustration, bend theantenna 90 degrees.

2

3

4

*Rotate first*Stand up next

Do not fly your modelwith the antenna's
tip pointing in its
direction.

5Stand up：1 ⇒ 5
Storage： 5 ⇒ 1

CAUTION
Do not grasp the transmitter antennaduring flight.
■Doing so may degrade the quality of the RFtransmission to the model.

Do not carry the transmitter by theantenna.
■The antenna wire may break, making operation
impossible.

Do not pull the antenna forcefully.

■The antenna wire may break, making operation
impossible.

15 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Transmitter LiPo Battery LT2F2000B
Installing/removing the LT2F2000B
Connect the battery
connector

Press the tab toopen the battery
cover.

Tab

Remove thebattery cover
Close the battery cover completely

Battery coverFirst insert two tabs
Be careful not to pinch
the wiring

Install the battery into the transmitter
Click !
This connector connects tothe transmitter.

Click !

LT2F2000B
LiPo Battery

Press the tab toclose the battery
cover.

CAUTIONBe sure to lock the battery cover.
* If the battery cover comes off during flight, the battery
will fall off and crash.

16 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Charging a battery
This set is not equipped with an AC adapter
for charging. Must be purchased separately.
● AC adapter USB-A type 5 V - 2 Aor● Futaba option AC adapter USB type

Access the charge port byflipping the rubber coveron the bottom of thetransmitter.

Use a commercially available
USB charger AC adapter
USB-A type 5 V-2 A

USB Cable

Charging LED
Red: Charging
Green: Full

WARNINGWARNINGBe careful not to drop the battery.

Do not plug and unplug the charger
when your hands are wet.

Never disconnect the battery connector
from the T16IZ transmitter after
turning off the power until the screen iscompletely blank and the transmitter has
shut down completely.
* Internal devices such as memories may be damaged.
* If there is any problem, the message "Backup Error" will
be shown the next time when you turn on the power of thetransmitter. Do not use the transmitter as it is. Send it to the
Futaba service center.

*It may cause an electric shock.

Do not overcharge/overdischarge thebattery.

*Overcharging/Overdischarging a battery can result inburns, fire, injuries, or loss of sight due to overheating,breakage, or electrolyte leakage.

CAUTION
When the charger is not in use,
disconnect it from the AC outlet.
* Do this to prevent accidents and to avoid overheating.

17 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

How to turn transmitter power ON/OFF

When turning on the power, the T16IZ transmitter will begin emitting RF automatically after it confirms
the surrounding RF conditions. The status of the transmitter is displayed by LED at the upper part of thefront of a T16IZ.
*If THR stick is high, a WARNING screen will appear. Another warning will appear if a power
supply is attached. (In Multicopter mode, the THR position alarm will not appear.)Power ON

Power OFFThrottle Stick Low

Power Switch

Power Switch

Long Push

Push

If the "Thr position" alarm displays*If the throttle stick is in the high position when the
power is turned ON

When the alarm activates, lower the throttle stick
before turning the receiver power ON.
*If the power is turned ON when the idle-up, air brake,etc., switches are ON, the above warning will display.
Ensure the relevant switches are turned OFF.

Tap this to stop the alarmand RF signal. Only panel
screen operation is active, thetransmitter will not link to any
receiver.

Warning alarm

If the power switches are turned off in the opposite order the model may unexpectedly run out of control andcause a very dangerous situation.

Turning on the power switches

1. Turn on the transmitter power switch.
2. Turn on the receiver or speed control power switch.

ON

Turning off the power switches

Always be sure the motor/engine is stopped.
1. Turn off the receiver or speed control power switch.
2. Then turn off the transmitter power switch.

OFF

ON

18 →

OFF

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Touch Display

Tapping the settings buttons foreach value on the settings screen
will cause value input buttons toappear at the top of the panel.

Tap the panel with your finger to navigate.
*Plastic film is attached to the Touch Display. Pleasebe careful so that you don't scratch the Touch
Display with anything hard such as a metal object.
Don't push the Touch Display with excessive force
or drop anything on the panel.
*Although you may find some air bubbles under theplastic panel due to environmental changes suchas temperature, it is not a defect and will cause no
problems.
*Color LCD is made from many pixels. Somepixels hold lighting. Moreover, some pixels go out.
And a screen may flicker. Such condition is thecharacteristics of color LCD. It is not failure.

Pressing and holding a value will
return it to its default setting.
Value input buttons display at the
top of the display.

Large change
in value

Small change
in value

Large change
in value

HOME/EXIT and U.MENU/MON.

HOME/EXIT

Return to theprevious screen
Return to thePress and holdhome screen
Press

Press fromHOME screen.

U.MENU/MON.
To user menu
display
Press and To servo monitor
holddisplayPress

To Telemetry
display

Press and hold
Panel lock / Lockfrom HOME
releasescreen.

19 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Lock Display

Temporarily activating this function makes it impossible to change data by accidental input during
flight.

How to lock1. With the home screen displayed.
2. Press the HOME/EXIT button for about 1
second. "Key Icon" is displayed and thekeys will be disabled.

Lock Display

HOME/EXIT Press and holdHow to unlock
1. Press the Home/Exit button for about 1
second, and the display will then become
unlocked.

CAUTION
The T16IZ's touch screen is very sensitive. To
avoid accidentally activating it during a flight, it
is suggested that it be locked. Due to the touch
screen's sensitivity, allowing it to be touchedduring flight by a neck strap hook, servo extension,or even your hand could be dangerous. Please use
the Touch Display lock for added safety during
flight.

Display unlock

HOME/EXIT Press and holdRF off mode

Model operation is disabled, but display operation without RF signal output is allowed. (Reduces
battery power consumption during set-up.)

U.MENU/MON.
Press and"RF off" Model
operation is notpossible, but only
panel operation is.

Restart the power
to transmit RF
signals.

Power ON

20 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Switch (SA-SH)

SF : 2 positions; Alternate;Long lever

SH : 2 positions; Momentary;Long lever

SE : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever

SG : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever

SA : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever
SB : 3 positions; Alternate;Long lever

SD : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever
SC : 3 positions; Alternate;Long lever*Self retum

2 positions

3 positions

Alternate

21 →Momentary

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

VolumeThe volume LD and RD knobs allow
analog input.

LD*The T16IZ transmitter beeps when the volume
knob reaches the center position.
*You can use each setting screen of the mixing
functions to select volumes and define thedirection of movement.

RD

SliderLS

RS

LS (Left), RS (Right):

The Linear Slider LS and RS offer analog input.
*The T16IZ transmitter beeps when the lever comes to the center.
*You can select a slide lever and set the movement direction on the setting screen of mixing functions.

22 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Digital Trims T1-T4

T4

T3

T2

T1

This transmitter is equipped with 4 digital trims.
Each time you press a trim button, the trim position
moves one step. If you continue pressing it, the trim
position starts to move faster. In addition, when
the trim position returns to the center, the tone willchange. You can always monitor trim positions byreferencing the LCD screen.
*You can select the trim step amount and the display unit
on the home screen on the T1-T4 setting screen within thelinkage menu.
Note: The trim positions you have set will be stored in the
non-volatile memory and will remain there.

Long push the trim as it
is to reset it to neutral.

Digital trim operational example*Example Stick Mode2◆When the airplane goes up while theelevator stick is neutral.

◆When the airplane dives while theelevator stick is neutral.

◆Elevator trim down

◆Elevator trim up

Elevator Neutral

Elevator Neutral

Elevator Down

Elevator Up◆Adjust so that the airplane ﬂies level.

23 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Monitor LED Display

The status of the transmitter is displayed by LED indicators on the upper porton of the T16IZ.

Red LED

Blue LED◆ Blinking Power switch is turned on withthe throttle stick on the high
side.

◆ OFF

◆ ON At startup

Power switch is turned on when
any condition switch is activated(in the ON state).

◆ ON

Radio waves are being transmitted.

Radio waves are in the OFF state.

◆ Blinking (0.5 s)◆ Blinking (1 s)

Stick Control

Link mode

Range check mode

*Example Stick Mode2

Elevator Stick
Pitch axis
Aileron stick

Roll axis

Engine /motor
Power

Throttle stick

Yaw axis

Rudder stick

24 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Stick control : Airplane Example

A general model example. (There is also a different operational model.)Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control
Right roll

Nose UpThe right aileronis up.

The left aileronis down.

Elevator stick

Aileron stickUP

To the right
Level ﬂight

Elevator isup.

Level ﬂight

NeutralElevator is
down.

Left roll

The left aileronis up.

*Example Stick Mode2

The right
aileron is
down.

Aileron stick

DOWN

To the left

(moved to the top)

Throttle Control
High throttle

Nose Right

Throttle stick

Rudder stick
A rudder isright.

HIGHT

To the right(moved to the top)

MiddleThrottle stick

Neutral

Nose Left

NeutralElevator stick

Nose Down

Yaw Axis Control

Straight(moved to the bottom)

MIDDLE(neutral)A rudder isleft.

Low throttle

Rudder stickThrottle stick

To the left

SLOW

(moved to the bottom)

25 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Stick control : Helicopter Example

A general model example. (There is also a different operational model.)*Example Stick Mode2

Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control
Right roll

Nose Up
Elevator stick

Aileron stickUP

To the right(moved to the bottom)

Level ﬂight
Level ﬂight
NeutralNeutralAileron stickElevator stick

Left roll

Nose Down

To the left

Nose Right

Yaw Axis Control

DOWN(moved to the top)

Throttle /Pitch Control

Rudder stickThrottle stickRise

To the right

Pitch UpHigh

Hovering

Throttle stick

NeutralStraight

Descent

MiddleMIDDLE(neutral)Pitch Down

Rudder stick
Nose Left

HIGHT(moved to the top)

Throttle stick

To the left

Slow

26 →

SLOW

(moved to the bottom)

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Stick control : Multicopter Example

A general model example. (There is also a different operational model.)*Example Stick Mode2

Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control
Right roll
Nose Up

Right slide

Elevator stick

Aileron stick

Hovering
Level ﬂight

UP

Back slide

To the right(moved to the bottom)

Hovering
Level ﬂight
NeutralNeutralLeft roll

Nose Down
Left slide

Aileron stick

Front slide

To the leftElevator stick
DOWN(moved to the top)

Throttle Control

Yaw Axis Control
Nose Right

Rudder stickThrottle stick

Rise

HIGH

To the right

Hovering
Level ﬂight(moved to the top)

Hovering
Throttle stick

NeutralMIDDLE(neutral)

Descent

Rudder stick
Nose Left

To the left

Stop

Throttle stick
SLOW(moved to the bottom)

27 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Stick Adjustment
Adjustment of the stick lever length

Adjustment of stick lever tension

You can adjust the length of stick levers as you
like. It is recommended to adjust the length of the
sticks in line with your hand size.

Lever headA

You can adjust how quickly the
stick returns to neutral.

Lever headB

1. Hold the lever head "B" and turn the leverhead "A" counter-clockwise. The lock will be
released.
2. Turn the lever-head "A" clockwise as you holdthe lever-head "B" after placing it as you like.

The tension of the self-return type stick lever canbe adjusted.

J2 stickJ3 stick

Spring → Hard

Spring → Hard

Spring → Soft

Spring → SoftJ1 stickJ4 stick

Spring → Hard

Spring → Hard

Spring → Soft

Spring → Soft

Back side
1. Use a screw driver to adjust the spring
strength as you prefer by turning theadjusting screw of the stick you want toadjust.

Turn screw counter-clockwise.
Turn screw clockwise.

*Turning the screw clockwise increases the tension.

CAUTION: Loosening the screw too much
can interfere with the internal stick operation.
Stick tension minimum

28 →Stick tension maximum

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Stick ModeRUD

ELE THR

AIL

RUD

MODE1

THR ELE

AIL

AIL

MODE2

ELE THR

RUD

MODE3

AIL

THR ELE

RUD

J3

J2

MODE4

Default
J2 stickJ3 stick

Spring → Hard

Spring → Hard

Spring → Soft

Spring → SoftJ2 stickJ2 stickJ3 stick

Spring → Free

Spring → Free

Spring → ACT

Spring → ACT

Ratchet → +Ratchet → FreeJ3 stick
Ratchet → +EX: MODE2 → MODE1

Ratchet → Free

Back side● System menu ⇒ H/W setting

Calibrate after
changing stick mode

Select stick mode

WARNING● The changed stick mode will bereflected from the newly createdmodel data.

● Before the flight, make sure that theoperation of the stick matches themodel operation.

● Change stick mode before enteringmodel data.

29 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

microSD card (secure digital memory card) (not included)
The T16IZ transmitter model data can be stored by using any commonly
found microSD card. When T16IZ update software is released, the software is
updated using a microSD card. The T16IZ is capable of using SD and SDHC
cards (SD:32MB-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB).

microSD card reader/writer
Saving model data and update files (released from
Futaba) into the microSD card, you can use thosefiles on your T16IZ transmitter. Equipment forreading and writing microSD cards is available atmost electronics stores.

Stored data
When you have a problem of saving or reading
data after a long period of use, please get a new
microSD card.
*We are not responsible for, and offer no compensation for,memory card data that fails or is damaged for any reason.
Be sure to keep a backup of all important data stored in yourmicroSD card.

Inserting/removing the microSD card
1） Rotate the antenna.

2） Open the rubber cover and insert the
microSD card into the SD card slot.

Card slot

3） When the microSD card is pressed in once
again, the card will be released from thecard slot and can be removed.

SD card slot
*Pay attention to the proper
orientation of the SD card, as
shown here.

The SD card slot is shown in the next figure.

30 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

-When a microSD card is installed in the
T16IZ transmitter, a folder called "Futaba" is created. Folders called "LOG" and"MODEL" are created in this folder. The"MODEL" folder stores the model data andthe "LOG" folder stores the telemetry log
data.

CAUTIONBe sure to turn off the power tothe transmitter before inserting or
removing the microSD card.
As the microSD card is a precision
device, do not use excessive force wheninserting.

-The telemetry log data recorded on the
microSD card can be converted to CSV
format by the telemeter log converter released on our home page. When copying or
moving a log file, always select both .FLI
and .FLD file.
Connector/PlugEarphone
Plug

Earphone plug
Connecting a stereo headphone to this plug, thespeech information of telemetry can be heard.

Open the rubber cover

S.BUS connector (S.I/F)
When using an S.BUS servo and telemetry sensor,
connect them both here.

TrainerConnector

S.BUS (S.I/F)
Connector

Connector for trainer function
When you use the trainer function, connect theoptional trainer cable between the transmitters forteacher and student.
*You can set the trainer function on the Trainer Function
screen in the System menu.

31 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Receiver Nomenclature
Before using the receiver, be sure to read theprecautions listed in the following pages.
Channels 1 ～ 6

Link/Mode
Channel 7 / Battery
Channel 8 or S.BUS

S.BUS2 : Telemetry sensor
or S.BUS2 equipment

Connector"1 through 6":outputs for the channels 1 through 6"7/B": outputs of 7 channels and power.
"8/SB": outputs of 8 channels or S.BUS port.
[S.BUS Sevo  S.BUS Gyro ]"S.BUS2": outputs of S.BUS2 port.
[Telemetry Sensor ]*When using nine or more channels, use an S.BUS
function or use a second R7108SB and link bothto your transmitter.

Link/Mode Switch
Use the small plastic screw driver that was included
with your receiver.
The Link/Mode Switch is also used for the CH
mode selection.
(The button is not used to link the transmitter andreceiver together. )＋－Extra Voltage Connector
Use this connector when using a voltage telemetry
device to send the battery voltage information (DC
0 ~ 70 V) from the receiver to the transmitter.
Please use the External voltage input cable.
(UBB0141) This connects directly to your main
motor batteries.

DANGER
Connector insertion
Firmly insert the connector in the direction shownin the figure. Insert the S.BUS2 by turning it 90
degrees.

WARNING
S.BUS2 connectors

Don't touch wiring.
* There is a danger of receiving an electric shock.

Do not short-circuit the battery
terminals.
* A short circuit across the battery terminals may cause
abnormal heating, fire and burns.

Don't connect an S.BUS servo/gyro to
S.BUS2 connector.

Please double check your polarity (+ and-) when hooking up your connectors.

LED Monitor
This monitor is used to check the CH mode of thereceiver.

* If + and - of wiring are mistaken, it will damage, ignite andexplode.

Don’ t connect to Extra Voltage before
turning on a receiver power supply.

32 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Connection of a receiver battery

WARNING
Please make sure that you use a battery
that can deliver enough capacity for thenumber and kind of servos used. Drybatteries cannot be used.

DANGER

Battery
3.7 ～ 7.4 V

SwitchReceiver

A battery is connectablealso with which port.
When all ports are used.

Servo

Do not insert either a switch
or battery in this manner.

Y-harness
SwitchBattery
3.7 ～ 7.4 V

Connection example

PWM

R7108SB

CH Mode→Mode A
SwitchSwitchto 8/SB port

HUB

R7108SB

S.BUS

HUB

S.BUS servos
Channel 1 -18

WARNING

Battery
Battery Conventional servos
Channel 1-8

Power supply

Please make sure that you use a battery that can deliver enough capacity forthe number and kind of servos used. Alkaline batteries cannot be used.

33 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

R7108SB CH Mode table

Channel Modes
The R7108SB is capable of changing its channel allocations as
described in the table below. This is especially important whenusing the receiver in a dual receiver mode.

Outputconnector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7/B
8/SB
Red LEDblink

1 Turn on the receiver. [Transmitter is always OFF]2 Press and hold the Link/Mode button for 5 seconds to 10
seconds.

3 When the LED of the receiver changes from blinking red
to blinking red with green, Link/Mode button is released.

ChannelMode A
1 ～ 8CH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Mode B
1 ～ 7CH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
S.BUS

Mode C
Mode D
9 ～ 16CH 9 ～ 15CH
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
S.BUS

1 time2 times

3 times

Default

4 The LED should now blink red two times in the patterns
described in the chart below.

5 Each press of the Link/Mode button advances the

Systemreceiver to the next mode.

4 times

LED Indication
StatusLED

Red Solid
Green Solid
FASSTest
Start → 2second
Waiting for link
later → Red
Blink（1second）
No signal reception
Red Solid
Receiving signals
Green Solid
FASST
Receiving signals
Green Blink
but ID is unmatched
Waiting for link
Red Blink
FASSTest Unrecoverable error Alternate blink
FASST(EEPROM, etc.)

6 When you reach the mode that you wish to operate in,press and hold the Link/Mode button for more than 2seconds. When LED blinks in green with red, it is thecompletion of a mode change, Link/Mode button isreleased.

7 Please cycle the receiver power off and back on again
after changing the Channel mode.

No signal reception
Receiving signals

Systems (FASSTest ⇔ FASST) change method        1 Turn on the receiver. [Transmitter is always OFF]2 Press and hold the Link/Mode button for 10 seconds to 15 seconds.
3 When the LED begins to blink green the button may be released.
4 The LED should now be blinking green in one of the patterns
described by the chart below.
( Default : FASSTest )5 Each press of the Link/Mode button advances the receiver to thenext system.

6 When you reach the system that you wish to operate in, press andhold the Link/Mode button for more than 2 seconds. When the LED
blinks green and red, the system change is complete. Release the
Link/Mode button.

7 Please cycle the receiver power off and back on again after
changing the system.
Green LEDblink
1 time2 times
3 times
4 times
5 times

R7108SB System table
SystemDefault
FASSTest
FASST Multi-ch Normal mode
FASST Multi-ch High-speed mode
FASST 7ch Normal mode
FASST 7ch High-speed mode

*FASST mode cannot use telemetry functions.

34 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Receiver's Antenna Installation

The R7108SB has two antennas. In order to maximize signal reception and promote safe modeling Futaba
has adopted a diversity antenna system. This allows the receiver to obtain RF signals on both antennas andfly problem-free.
*Must be kept as straight as possible.

AntennaSleeveCoaxial cable

To obtain the best results of the diversity function,please refer to the following instructions:
1. The two antennas must be kept as straight as
possible. Otherwise it will reduce the effective
range.
Do not bend the antenna partFix the sleeve to the model
Gently bend the coaxial
cable part.

Antennainstallation

90°

Coaxial cable

SleeveAntenna part

R7108SB Receiver

2. The two antennas should be placed at 90
degrees to each other.
This is not a critical figure, but the mostimportant thing is to keep the antennas
away from each other as much as possible.
Larger models can have large metal objects
that can attenuate the RF signal. In this casethe antennas should be placed at bothsides of the model. Then the best RF signal
condition is obtained at any flying attitude.
3. The antennas must be kept away fromconductive materials, such as metal, carbon
and fuel tank by at least a half inch. The
coaxial part of the antennas does not need
to follow these guidelines, but do not bend it
in a tight radius.
4. Keep the antennas away from the motor,
ESC, and other noise sources as much as
possible.

35 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Mounting the Servo*Servo is not included in this set.

Wood screw

2.3-2.6mm nut
washerRubbergrommetBrass eyelet

RubbergrommetBrass eyelet

Safety precautions when you
install receiver and servos.
WARNING

Connecting connectors

Be sure to insert the connector until it
stops at the deepest point.

Servo mount
Servo mount2.3-2.6mm screw(Airplane/Glider)(Helicopter)

Servo lead wires
To prevent the servo lead cable from being
broken by vibration during flight, provide alittle slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable
points. Periodically check the cable during daily
maintenance.

How to protect the receiver from vibration andwater

Wrap the receiver with something
soft such as foam rubber to avoid
vibration. If there is a chance ofgetting wet, put the receiver in awaterproof bag or balloon.

Receiver's antenna

Never cut the receiver's antenna. Do
not bind the receiver's antenna withthe cables for servos.

Locate the receiver's antenna as far as
possible from metals or carbon fiber
components such as frames, cables,
etc.
Margin in the lead wire.

Fasten about 5-10cm
from the servo outlet sothat the lead wire is neatand secure.

*Cutting or binding the receiver's antenna will reduce theradio reception sensitivity and range, and may cause acrash.

Servo throw

Adjust your system so that pushrods
will not bind or sag when operating
the servos to the full extent.

Mounting the power switch*Switch is not included in this set.

When mounting a power switch to an airframe,
make a rectangular hole that is a little larger than
the total stroke of the switch so that you can turnthe switch ON/OFF without binding.
Avoid mounting the switch where it can becovered by engine oil and dust. In general, it isrecommended to mount the power switch on theside of the fuselage that is opposite the muffler.

Attached screw*If excessive force is continuously applied to a servo, theservo could be damaged due to force on the gear train
and/or power consumption causing rapid battery drain.

Mounting servos

Use a vibration-proof rubber (such as
rubber grommet) under a servo when
mounting the servo on a servo mount.
And be sure that the servo cases do
not touch directly to the metal parts
such as servo mount.

Less than 5 mm of
mounting plate

Switch cover*If the servo case contacts the airframe directly, vibration
will travel to and possibly damage the servo.

Switch36 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

S.BUS/S.BUS2 Installation

This set uses the S.BUS/S.BUS2 system. The wiring is as simplified and clean mounting as possible,
even with models that use a large number of servos. In addition, the wings can be quickly installed to thefuselage without any erroneous wiring by the use of only one simple wire, even when there are a large
number of servos used.
●When using S.BUS/S.BUS2, special settings and mixes in your transmitter may be unnecessary.
●The S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos memorize the number of channels themselves. (settable with the T16IZ)●The S.BUS/S.BUS2 system and conventional system (receiver conventional CH used) can be mixed.

S.BUS

Glider usage example
Receiver: R7108SB
Servo: S3174SV×9 ( Optional )HUB×4 ( Optional )Throttle servo: BLS173SV ( Optional )Battery: FR2F1800 ( Optional )S.BUS Aerobatic plane usage example

Switch: HSW-L
Receiver: R7108SB
Aileron servo: BLS174SV×2 ( Optional )HUB×3 ( Optional )Rudder Servo: BLS175SV×1 ( Optional )Elevator servo: BLS173SV×2 ( Optional )37 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

S.BUS2 System

When using the S.BUS2 port, an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized.

S.BUS2 TABLE

Receiver port

S.BUS Servo
S.BUS Gyro

S.BUS2 Servo
S.BUS2 Gyro

Telemetry sensor

S.BUS

○

○

×

S.BUS2

× （※）

○

○

（※）Don't connect S.BUS Servo, S.BUS
Gyro to S.BUS2 connector.

S.BUS servos and gyros and S.BUS2 servos and gyros must be used in the correct receiverports. Please refer to the instruction manual to make sure you connect to the correct one.

CH Mode is set
to ModeB [D].

S.BUS
Port
(8/SB)
S.BUS2
Port

Hub

Hub

S.BUS Servo
Mixed connectionof S.BUS and S.BUS2
is possible.

S.BUS2 servo
Connection is possible

Hub

Hub

Telemetry
Sensors

S.BUS2 Servo

S.BUS servo
Connection is impossible

S.BUS2 gyro
Connection is possible

S.BUS2
GYRO

Telemetry sensor
Connection is impossible

＋

Servo

38 →

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

S.BUS/S.BUS2 device setting

S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or a telemetry sensor can be connected directly to the T16IZ. Channel setting andother data can be entered for the S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or sensors.
1. Connect the S.BUS device as shown in the
figure.
2. Turn on the transmitter power.
3. Call the setup screen.
Servo: System Menu → S.BUS servo
Sensor: Linkage Menu → Sensor
4. Perform setting in accordance with eachscreen.
5. This sets the channel and other data for each
S.BUS servo, or telemetry device to be usedwith the S.BUS device or receiver.

S.BUS/S.BUS2
deviceS.BUS/S.BUS2
device(S.BUS/S.BUS2 servo)(Telemetry sensor)

WARNING

Do not disconnect or turn transmitter power OFF
while S.BUS servo and telemetry sensor data is
being saved.

■ S.BUS servo and sensor save data will be lost,
resulting in malfunction.

39 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Home Screen
This is the Home screen and descriptions of its menus. Use your finger to operate the touch screen.

Battery voltage for receivers

Condition nameBattery Indicator• In FASSTest/T-FHSS mode, thisdata displayed. RX voltage
and Ext voltage display• The condition namethat is currently used
is displayed here.

• When battery is low, the alarm
will beep. Land your aircraft
immediately.

→ (Menu)• Model menu
Tap the Icon to call Model
Menu screen.

System mode
• System(FASSTest18CH etc.)
Type is displayed here.

RF Indicator

The reception of the signal from thereceiver to the transmitter is shown.

Model Name

• This does not affect flight.

Timer1, Timer2

User's name• Timer is displayed here.
Tap the time button to start/stop thetimer. (When the screen is tapped for
1 second, timer is reset to the initialvalue.)• The model name thatis currently used isdisplayed here.

→ (Menu)• System• Linkage• Model selectTap the button to call each Menu
screen.

System timer

Digital trim (T1 to T4)• This shows the accumulated timesince the latest reset. (Each model /Total)(Hour):(Minute):(Second)• Trim position is displayed
here.

WARNINGBe sure to confirm the model name before flying your aircraft.
Check the battery voltage as often as possible and try to charge the battery earlier.
If the battery alarm makes a sound, land your aircraft immediately.

*You can adjust the LCD contrast by the display setting in the system menu.

40 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

LINK
Link Procedure (T16IZ/R7108SB)

Each transmitter has an individually assigned, unique ID code. In order to start operation, the receiver mustbe linked with the ID code of the transmitter to which it is being paired. Once the link is made, the ID codeis stored in the receiver and no further linking is necessary unless the receiver is to be used with anothertransmitter. When you purchase additional R7108SB receivers, this procedure is necessary; otherwise thereceiver will not work.
Link procedure
1. Place the transmitter and the receiver close
to each other within half (0.5m) meter.

6.[Link] is tapped. The transmitter will emit achime as it starts the linking process.

Less than 0.5 m

2. Turn on the transmitter.
3. Select [System type] at the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen shown below
by tapping the screen.

7. When the transmitter starts to chime, poweron the receiver. The receiver should link to
the transmitter within about 1 second.

4. When you use two receivers on one model,
you must change from [Single] to [Dual].
*O nl y tw o re c e iv e rs c a n b e us e d . I n"Dual", two setting items come out. Input,
respectively.
ID of a primary
receiver displays.

ID of a secondary
receiver displays.

In "Link" Mode

Receiver ON

In Dual, a primary receiver (Rx1) islinked first. Next, a secondary (Rx2)
receiver is linked.
5. Battery fail-safe voltage can be changed
from the initial value of 3.8V here.
* Only in FASSTest/T-FHSS Mode.

8. If linking fails, an error message is displayed.
Bring the transmitter closer to the receiverand repeat the procedure above from Step 2.

41 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

LINK
9. ACT will be chosen if telemetry is used.
It is INH when not using it.

*When you use two receivers, please be sure to
setup a "Rx1" and "Rx2" in the "dual" mode.
*Telemetry function cannot be used for the 2ndreceiver. → FASSTest18CH*Telemetry function cannot be used for the dual
receiver. → T-FHSS, FASSTest12CH*You must link one receiver at a time. If both
power supplies to the receivers are switched on
simultaneously, data is received incorrectly by
the transmitter.
*You cannot link three receivers.

10. When a telemetry function is enabled,
the receiving interval (down-link interval)of sensor data can be changed. If a D/
L interval is increased, the response of thesensor data display becomes slower, butstick response will improve.
Initial value: 1.0s
Adjustment range: 0.1s~2.0s*Link is required when a system type ischanged.
*Linking is required whenever a new model is
made.
*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be
selected for Europe.

WARNING

After the linking is done, please cycle
receiver power and check that thereceiver to be linked is really under thecontrol of the transmitter.

Do not perform the linking procedure
with motor's main wire connected orwith the engine operating as it may
result in serious injury.
*If there are many FASSTest (T-FHSS) systems
turned on around your receiver, it might notlink to your transmitter. In this case, even if thereceiver's LED stays solid green, unfortunately
the receiver might have established a link
to one of other transmitters. This is very
dangerous if you do not notice this situation.
In order to avoid the problem, we strongly
recommend you to double check whether
your receiver is really under control by yourtransmitter by giving the stick input and thenchecking the servo response.

After setting*Do not perform the linking operation when
the drive motor is connected or the engine isrunning.
After setting, press a HOME/EXIT button

42 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Model ID

FASSTest, T-FHSS
For the sake of safety, this function does not operate the receiver if the model data of the model program
settings that does not match the aircraft is used by mistake.
Model ID

Conventional system

Select Model 2

Operation

Rx 1

Not Operation

Rx 1

Operation

Rx 2

Operation

Rx 2

Operation

Rx 3

Not Operation

Rx 3

Select Model 2

It works with diﬀerent model data.
There is a risk of ﬂying with diﬀerent model data !

Model 2 only works with Model 2 data.
There is no risk of ﬂying with diﬀerent model data.

Link is required when a new model is made from a model selection.
Add new model data
Model 1 Receiver

1:Model 12:

Model 23:

Model 31:Model 12:

Model 23:

Model 31:Model 12:

Model 23:

Model 3

Link

Model 2 Receiver

Link

Link

Model 3 Receiver

Select a model in Model Select. Link with a receiver that matches the model.

■ In the system types (FASSTest, T-FHSS) compatible
with the model ID function, a unique ID number(model ID) is set to each model data. Linking witha receiver stores the model ID of the model datain that receiver. The receiver operates only when
it receives radio waves transmitted using model
data that matches the stored model ID. As a result,
the receiver does not operate even if model data ofan unintended setting is used by mistake, so it ispossible to prevent a malfunction due to a model
selection mistake.
■ If you want to use different model data from themodel data that you have been using, link again.

■ For safety reasons, model ID function can not bedisabled.
■ Model data that can be stored in internal memory is
up to 250 models.
■ Model ID is automatically set when copying or
adding model data.
■ R3004SB receiver does not support model ID
function. When using the R3004SB, set “Receiver”
in the system type screen T-FHSS mode setting to[R3004SB]. When using other T-FHSS compatible
receivers, set "Receiver" to [Normal].

■ Model ID feature is enabled only if the system type
is FASSTest or T-FHSS. Please note that model ID
function can not be used on other systems.

43 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Range Testing Your R/C System

It is extremely important to range check your models prior to each flying session. This enables you to ensurethat everything is functioning as it should and to obtain maximum enjoyment from your time flying. The T16IZ
transmitter incorporates a system that reduces its power output and allows you to perform such a range check.
Range check mode

1. While pushing "U.MENU/MON." button.

2. THR Stick Slow.

3. T16IZ Power ON.

During this mode, the RF power output is reduced so therange test can be performed. In addition, when this modeis activated the right LED on the front of the transmitter
starts blinking and the transmitter gives users a warningwith a beeping sound.
The "Range check mode" continues for 60 seconds andafter that the power will return to the normal level. To
exit the "Range check mode" before the 60 seconds,press the "HOME/EXIT" button. NEVER start flying
when the "Range check mode" is active.
Should you require additional time to perform a range
check, highlight Restart before your time expires and tap
the screen one time.

Range check procedure

4. Select "Range check" at the System menu.

1. With the "Range check mode" on, walk away fromthe model while simultaneously operating thecontrols. Have an assistant stand by the model
to confirm that all controls are completely andcorrectly operational. You should be able towalk approximately 30-50 paces from the model
without losing control.
2. If everything operates correctly, return to themodel. Set the transmitter in a safe, yet accessible,
location so it will be within reach after starting theengine or motor. Be certain the throttle stick is in
the low throttle position, then start the engine or
motor. Perform another range check with yourassistant holding the aircraft with the engine
running at various speeds. If the servos jitter ormove inadvertently, there may be a problem.
We would strongly suggest you do not fly until thesource of the difficulty has been determined. Look
for loose servo connections or binding pushrods.
Also, be certain that the battery has been fully
charged.

Range checking on
low power.

About 100 feet

5. "Start" tap.

Range check mode

WARNING

Do not fly in the range check mode.

6. The HOME/EXIT button is pressed
to end a range check.

*Since the range of the radio waves is short, if the model
is too far from the transmitter, control will be lost andthe model will crash.

44 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

MODEL BASIC SETTING PROCEDURE
Airplane basic setting procedure

1. Model addition and call
Initial setting assigns 1 model to the T16IZ
transmitter. The Model Select function is used to
add models and to select models which are alreadyset.
● If the direction of the servo is incorrect, adjust
the direction with the Reverse function of the
Linkage menu.

The data for up to 30 models can be saved
to the transmitter. Data can also be saved to theoptional microSD card.
The currently selected model name is displayed at the
top of the screen. Before flying and before changing any
settings, always confirm the model name.

2. Model type selection
Select the model type matched to the aircraft with theModel type select function of the Linkage menu. For an
airplane, select the model type from among the 2 types:
airplane and glider. After the wing type is selected thetail type select screen is displayed. Select the tail typematched to the aircraft.
There are 13 wing types and 3 tail types for airplaneand glider.

3. Fuselage linkage
Connect the ailerons, elevators, throttle, rudder, etc.
in accordance with the model's instruction manual.
For a description of the connection method, see the"Servos connection by model type".
Note: The channel assignment of the T16IZ isdifferent from that of our existing systems. Notethat even for the same "airplane model", when thewing type and tail type are different, the channel
assignment may be different. (The channel assigned
to each function can be checked at the "Function"of the Linkage menu.)● Adjust the neutral position and control surface
angle with the linkage, and fine tune themwith the Sub trim and End point functions(angle adjustment). To protect the linkage,a limit position can also be set with the End
point function. The End point function canadjust the amount of up/down and left/rightmovement, limit, and servo speed of eachchannel.

4. Throttle cut setting
Throttle cut can be performed with one touch by aswitch without changing the throttle trim position.
Set throttle cut with the Throttle cut function of the
Linkage menu. After activating the throttle cut function
and selecting the switch, adjust the throttle position sothat the carburetor becomes fully closed. For safety, thethrottle cut function operates the throttle stick in the 1/3
or less (slow side) position.

45 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

7. Airbrake
This function is used when an air brake is necessary
when taking off or diving, etc.
The preset elevators and flaps (camber flap, brake flap)
offset amount can be activated by a switch.

5. Idle down setting
The idling speed can be lowered with one touch bya switch without changing the throttle trim position.
Perform this setting with the Idle down function of the
Linkage menu. After activating the Idle down function
and selecting the switch, adjust the idle down speed. For
safety, the idle down function acts only when the throttle
stick is slow side.

The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and flap
servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the speed of theaileron, elevator, and flap servos can be adjusted. (Inside/Out side) A delay can be set for each condition,
and a cut switch which will turn OFF the delay can bechosen. Trim amounts can be fine-tuned by setting a VR.
You can also set the auto mode, which will link Airbraketo a stick, switch, or dial. A separate stick switch or dialcan also be set as the ON/OFF switch.

*While the Throttle cut function is in operation, the Idle downfunction does not work.

8. Addition of flight conditions

6. AFR (D/R)
AFR function is used to adjust the throw and operation
curve of the stick, lever, and switch functions for eachflight condition. This is normally used after End point
has defined the maximum throw directions.

The Condition select function automatically allocates
the Condition 1 for each model. Condition 1 is thedefault condition and is the only one active when a newmodel type is defined.
If you want to add flight conditions, please refer to a
description of the Condition select function.

*The Condition 1 is always on, and remains on until otherconditions are activated by switches.
*When a new condition is added, the model data of theCondition 1 is automatically copied to the new condition.
*You can set the model data of new condition in the switch
ON state. However, if the group mode (Gr) was selected inadvance, the same data will be input at all the conditions.
Select the single mode (Sngl) and adjust only the condition
you want to change. For Group/Single mode switching, referto the description at the back of this manual.
*The Condition delay can be programmed for each channel.
The Condition delay is used to change the servo throwsmoothly when switching conditions.

46 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Helicopter basic setting procedure

This section outlines examples of use of the helicopter functions of the T16IZ. Adjust the actual values, etc.
to match the fuselage used.
1. Model addition and callDefault setting assigns 1 model to the T16IZ. To add
new models or to call a model already set, use the Modelselect function.

This is convenient when calling a model after
registering the model names in advance. (The data of up
to 30 models can be saved at the transmitter. Data canalso be saved to the optional microSD card.)
The currently called model is displayed at the topof the screen. Before flying and before changing any
settings, always confirm the model name.

2. Model type and swash type selection
If a different model type is already selected, selecthelicopter with the Model type function of the Linkage
menu, and then select the swash type matched to thehelicopter.

3. Flight condition addition
The transmitter can install up to eight flight
conditions per model.

The Condition select function automaticallyallocates five conditions for helicopter.
(General setting)● Normal● Idle up1● Idle up2● Idle up3● HoldNote: Delete conditions you have not set
up and will not use. Otherwise you may
accidentally activate them during flight andcause a crash.

*For a description of the condition deletion, refer to theCondition select function.

The Normal condition is always on, and remains on
until other conditions are activated by switches.
The priority is throttle hold/idle up 2/idle up 1/
normal. Throttle hold has the highest priority.
Add other conditions, as required.
The Condition delay can be programmed for eachchannel. The Condition delay is used to change theservo throw smoothly when switching conditions.
(General flight condition setting example)● Normal: (Use initial setting conditions/operate
when switch OFF)Use from engine starting to hovering.

● Idle up 1: (Operate at SW-E center)

Use in 540º stall turn, loop, rolling stall turn, and othermaneuvers.

● Idle up 2: (Operate at SW-E forward side)
Use in rolls.

*The Model type function automatically selects theappropriate output channels, control functions, and mixing
functions for the chosen model type. Eight swash types areavailable for helicopters.
*For a description of the swash type selection, refer to theModel type function.

● Throttle hold: (Operate at SW-G forward side)
Use in auto rotation.

47 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

4. Fuselage linkage
Connect the throttle rudder, aileron, elevator,
pitch, and other servos in accordance with the
kit instruction manual. For a description of theconnection method, see "Servos connection bymodel type".
Note: The channel assignment of the T16IZ
is different from that of our existing systems.
(The channel assigned to each function can
be checked at the Function menu of the
Linkage menu.)● Swash plate correction (Except H-1 mode)*If any interactions are noticed, for a description of thelinkage correction function, please refer to the SWASH
function.

5. Throttle/Pitch curve settingThis function adjusts the throttle or pitch operation
curve in relation to the movement of the throttle
stick for each condition.

● If the direction of operation of the servo is
incorrect, use the Reverse function of the
Linkage menu. Also use the swash AFR
function in other than the H-1 mode.
<Throttle curve setting example>

Call the throttle curve of each condition with thecondition select switch.
●Normal curve adjustment

Normal curve creates a basic throttle curve
centered near hovering. This curve is adjusted
together with the pitch curve (Normal) so that theengine speed is constant and up/down control iseasiest.

●Idle up curve adjustment

The low side Throttle curve creates a curve
matched for aerobatics (loop, roll, 3D, etc.).

●Throttle hold curve adjustment● Adjust the direction of operation of the gyro.
(Gyro side function)● Connect the throttle linkage so that the
carburetor can fully close at full trim throttle
cut.
● Adjust the neutral position at the linkage
side and fine tune with the Sub-Trim function
and End point function (rudder angle
adjustment). To protect the linkage, a limit
position can also be set with the End point
function.

The curve is not used when performing auto rotation
dives.
Confirm that the rate of the slowest position (0%) of
the stick is 0% (initial setting).

<Example of pitch curve setting>Call the pitch curve of each condition with thecondition select switch.
●Pitch curve (Normal)

Make the pitch at hovering approximately +5º~6º.
Set the pitch at hovering with the stick position at
the 50% point as the standard.
*Stability at hovering may be connected to the throttle curve.
Adjustment is easy by using the hovering throttle function
and hovering pitch function together.

●Pitch curve (Idle up 1)

The idle up 1 pitch curve function creates a curve
matched to airborne flight.
Set to -7º~+12º as standard.

48 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

●Pitch curve (Idle up 2)

The high side pitch setting is less than idle up 1.
The standard is +8º.

●Pitch curve (Hold)At auto rotation, use the maximum pitch at boththe high and low sides.
[Pitch angle setting example]
Throttle hold: -7º~+12º

6. AFR (D/R)
AFR (D/R) function is used to adjust the throw andoperation curve of aileron, elevator and rudder for eachcondition.

8. Throttle hold setting*If throttle hold is necessary, please refer to the Throttle holdfunction.

9. Throttle cut setting
Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop theengine, by flipping a switch with the throttle stick at
idle. The action is not functional at high throttle to
avoid accidental dead sticks. The switch’s locationand direction must be chosen, as it defaults to INH.

*For throttle and pitch curve settings, refer to the abovementioned "Throttle/Pitch curve setting"This is normally used after End point has defined the
maximum throw directions.
*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the cut position until theengine consistently shuts off, but throttle linkage is not binding.

10. Swash Mix corrects aileron,elevator and pitch interaction
The swash mixing function is used to correct theswash plate in the aileron (Left/Right Cyclic)
and elevator (Forward/Aft Cyclic) direction
corresponding to each operation of each condition.

7. Gyro sensitivity and mode switching
The gyro sensitivity and mode switching function
is dedicated gyro mixing of the Model menu, andcan be set for each condition.

11. Throttle mixing setting*If throttle mixing is necessary to compensate for engine
slowing caused when the swash plate operates at the sametime as ailerons or elevator, please refer to the Throttle
mixing function.

12. Other special mixings●Pitch to Needle mixing●Normal condition (hovering): Gyro sensitivity
maximum●Idle up 1/Idle up 2/Throttle hold: Gyro
sensitivity minimum●However, at auto rotation of a tail-driven
helicopter, this function may not have any
effect at high gyro sensitivity.

This mixing is used with engines that allow needle
control during flight (fuel-air mixture adjustment).
A needle curve can be set. The needle servo
rise characteristics at throttle stick acceleration/
deceleration operation can be adjusted.
(Acceleration function)●Governor mixing

This mixing is dedicated governor mixing when agovernor is used. Up to 3 rates (speeds) can beswitched for each condition.

49 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Servo Connection by Model TypeThe T16IZ transmitter channels are automatically assigned for optimal combination according to the typeselected with the Model type function of the Linkage menu. The channel assignment (initial setting) for
each model type is shown below. Connect the receiver and servos to match the type used.
*The set channels can be checked at the Function screen of the Linkage menu. The channel assignments can also be changed.
For more information, read the description of the Function menu.

Airplane/glider●Normal tail and V tail

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider1

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle Rudder Throttle Rudder Throttle Rudder

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder Aileron2 Rudder Aileron2 Rudder Aileron2

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2 Aileron2

Airbrake Airbrake Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

Gear

Flap

Gear

Aileron3

Gear

Aileron3

Flap

Flap

Aileron2

Flap2

Aileron2 Aileron4 Aileron2 Aileron4

7

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap

Flap3

Aileron3

Flap

Aileron3

Flap

8

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap2

Flap4

Aileron4

Flap2

Aileron4

Flap2

9

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Flap3

Motor

Flap

Motor

Flap

Flap3

10

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

Flap4

AUX6

Flap2

AUX6

Flap2

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap3

Motor

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Flap4

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

15

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX3

Butterfly

16

AUX1

AUX1

Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

T-FHSS

Glider

6

2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAPFASST MULT

Airplane

Aileron2AIL

FASSTest 18CH
The output
FASSTest 12CH
CH of each
S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

1AIL
RX
CH Airplane Glider*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.

V-tailNormal50 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Airplane/glider●Ailevator

2

Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron6

Airbrake Airbrake Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

7

Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3

8

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4

9

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

10

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

11

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap3

Flap3

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap4

Flap4

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Gear

AUX6

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

15

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX2

Butterfly

AUX2

Butterfly

AUX4

Butterfly

16

AUX1

AUX1

Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

T-FHSS

AileronFASST MULT

1

FASSTest 18CH
The output
FASSTest 12CH
CH of each
S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

1AIL
2AIL
2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAPRX
CH Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.

Elevator 2 servo

51 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Airplane/glider●Tailless wing
4AIL+2FLAP

4AIL+4FLAP

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider1

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron

2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2 Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3
Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4

6

Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

7

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

8

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

9

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Flap3

Flap3

10

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX4

AUX4

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX3

Butterfly

15

Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

T-FHSS

2AIL+4FLAPFASST MULT

2AIL+2FLAPFASSTest 18CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

2AIL+1FLAPThe output
CH of eachsystem2AILRXCH Airplane Glider

16 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.

Flying Wing

52 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Airplane/glider●Tailless wing Winglet 2 Rudder
2AIL+4FLAP

4AIL+2FLAP

4AIL+4FLAP

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

GliderAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder Rudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2 Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3
Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4

Motor

6

Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

7

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

8

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

9

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Flap3

Flap3

10

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Rudder2 Rudder2

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX1

Butterfly

AUX3

Butterfly

15

Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

16

Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator

Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

T-FHSS

1FASST MULT

Airplane

FASSTest 18CH

2AIL+2FLAPFASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

2AIL+1FLAPThe output
CH of eachsystem

2AIL

RX
CH

*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.

Rudder 2 servo* Output channels differ by each system of a table. When using a system with few channels,
there is a wing type which cannot be used. It cannot be used when there is a function
required out of the range of the arrow of a figure.

53 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Helicopter

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Throttle

4

RudderRudder

5

Gyro

Gyro

6

Pitch

Pitch

7

Governor

Governor

8

Elevator2

Governor2

AileronAileronCH

H-4/H-4X Swash

All other2

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Throttle

4

Elevator2

Rudder

5

Pitch

Pitch

6

Gyro

Gyro

7

Governor

Governor8

RudderGovernor2
Gyro2

1

AileronAileron

9

Gyro2

Gyro2

9

Gyro2

10

Gyro3

Gyro3

10

Gyro3

11

Governor2

Needle

DG1

SW

12

Needle

AUX5

DG2

SW

13

AUX4

14

AUX3

15

AUX2

16

AUX1

DG1

SW

DG2

SW

FASSTest 12CH

2

1

●FASSTest 12CH

The output
CH of eachsystemAll other

T-FHSS

H-4/H-4X SwashFASST MULTCH

The output FASSTest 18CH
CH of each S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

●FASSTest 18CH / FASST MULTI /FASST 7CH / S-FHSS

Gyro3*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.

Multicopter

Multicopter
Aileron2

Elevator

3

Throttle

4

Rudder

5

Gyro

6

Gyro2
Gyro3

8

Camera TILT

9

Camera PAN

10

Camera REC

11

Mode

12

AUX5

13

AUX4

14

AUX3

15

AUX2

16

AUX1

DG1

SW SD

DG2

SW SA

T-FHSS

7

FASST MULT1

The output
CH of eachsystemFASSTest 18CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

CH

*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.

54 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTSSYSTEM MENUThe System menu sets up functions of thetransmitter. This does not set up any model data.

● When the System menu button is tapped,
the menu shown below is called up. Tap thefunction button that you want to enter.

System menu functions table
Display

Display adjustment.

Sound  volume

Adjust the volume of: Other sound, Warning, Voice

System timer

Resets the system timer.

H/W setting

Stick mode selection (Mode 1 - Mode 4 ). J1-J4 sticks correction can be performed.

Battery

Battery alarm voltage setting. Auto power off time setting.

Range check

The output of the transmitter is lowered, for Range checking.

S.Bus servo

S.Bus servo setting.

Information

Sets the User name, Language, and Unit system. Displays the program version, and microSD card information.

●Return to Home screen

55 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Display
The following LCD screen adjustments:● Backlighting brightness adjustment● Backlighting decrease time adjustment● Touch screen calibration●Return to System menu

● Tap the [Display] button in the System menu
to call the setup screen shown below.

Backlight max. brightness adjustment

Touch calibration

1. Adjust the backlighting brightness with thevalue input buttons.

This function adjusts the location of the Touch
Panel. Press the "Touch calibration" button.
The calibration screen will then pop up.
Tap the center of the cross hair cursor on
the screen with the soft pen. As soon as thesystem recognizes the position, the cursor
will move on to the next position. Repeat thisprocedure as long as the cursor moves to next
position. You will do this five times. Calibration
will be carried out based on the five positions.
Disappearance of the cross hair cursor means
the calibration has been completed.

*When the ▲ button is tapped, the backlighting becomesbrighter. When the ▼ button is tapped, the backlighting
becomes darker.

Backlight min. brightness adjustment
1. Adjust the backlight decrease brightness withthe value input buttons.
*When the ▲ button is tapped, the backlighting becomesbrighter. When the ▼ button is tapped, the backlighting
becomes darker.
*It cannot be made brighter than Backlighting brightness
adjustment.

Backlight decrease time

*In ordinary operation, this calibration is not necessary. If
you notice the Touch Panel is not functioning correctly after
long use, we recommend that you carry out this calibration.

1. You can set a time period to decrease the
LCD backlight. This function counts the periodthat the Touch Panel has been not operated.
This time can be set by ten-second steps. You
can also turn off the backlight decrease* ifyou like.

*The backlight consumes a large amount of power. We
recommend that you turn off the backlight by setting thebacklight power-off time to about one minute.

56 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Sound volume

Sound volume settingThis function can set the volume of "Other sound,""Warning," and "Voice," respectively.
● Tap the [Sound volume] button in the Systemmenu to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to System menu

The respective volume
control

Sound volume Setting method

2. You can change the sound volume bytapping the " ▲▲ " " ▲ " " ▼▼ " " ▼ " buttonof four items.
*If you tap " ▲ ", the volume will increase. If you tap the" ▼ ", the volume will decrease.

1. When the Sound volume box is tapped, theabove screen will appear.

System timer

Integrating timer resettingThis function adjusts the system timer of the T16IZ
transmitter. The system timer can also be reset.

*The system timer is displayed on the Home screen.

● Tap the [System timer] button in the System menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to System menu
● Total : Regardless of amodel, additional time incase a power supply is ON
is displayed.

● Model : The additionaltime when the power
supply was set to ON isdisplayed for every model.

Resets the timer
if pressed.

System timer reset
The system timer shows the total timethat has elapsed since the last "reset".
1. Tap "Total" or "Model" to choose reset.
2. Tap the [System timer] button.
3. Tap "Yes" in the next screen to reset the timer.

57 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

H/W setting

Stick mode selection and J1-J4 sticks calibration

Stick mode
Mode 1-4 can be chosen.
But, it isn't changed until data is reset.

Usually, this H/W setting is unnecessary.
Please perform this calibration only if a change at
the center of a stick should arise after prolonged use.
● Tap the [Calibration] button in the Systemmenu to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return toSystem menu

To change the mode the stick ratchet
must be changed. Request that thisbe done by Futaba Service. (Charged
modification)
RUD

ELE THR

AIL

RUD

MODE1
AIL

ELE THR

1. Tap the "Calibration" button.

AIL

MODE2

RUD

MODE3

How to Calibrate

THR ELEAIL

THR ELE

RUD

MODE4

*Please do not press the stick too firmly in any direction when
doing the calibration.
*Check after calibration to make sure that neutral is 0%, thebottom right side is +100%, and the top left side is -100%.

2. Choose the stick to calibrate right and left.
3. The stick is set at neutral and the [Set neutral]
button is tapped.

TappedFull right andfull bottom

TappedThe stick is set at
neutralTapped

4. The stick is held at full right and full bottom(diagonal). The [Set endpoint] button istapped.
5. The stick is held at full left and full top(diagonal). The [Set endpoint] button istapped.

Full left andfull top

58 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

BatteryLow battery alarm voltage set

Select the battery alarm voltage according to thebattery to be used.

It isn't indicated in caseof manual setting.

●Return to System menu

Battery type change :Lipo(2cells) → Manual
setting
When choosing manual
setting, the numericalvalue can be input.

It's dangerous to
set it manually inthe low voltage.

Vibrator Types

Auto power off time settingThis function prevents battery
discharging if the transmitter power
supply does not erase.
1. Adjust the auto power off time withthe value input buttons.

Type 1
Type 2*When the time the transmitter is inactive reaches
the set time, the power is turned off automatically.
This time can be set up to 1 hour in 10 minutes
increments. The auto power off function can also
be deactivated.
*An audible alarm is sounded from 3 minutes
before auto power off. When a stick or switch isoperated, the alarm is cleared.

Range Check

Type 3*When the low battery voltage setting is changed, it is changed forevery model in the transmitter. A unique voltage cannot be set foreach model. A change in the low battery voltage setting also does
not reset other data.

Before a flight ground range check.

The 'range check mode' reduces the transmission
range of the radio waves to allow for a ground
range check.

WARNING
Do not fly in the range check
mode.

*The range check mode, when activated, will continue for
60 seconds unless the user exits this mode early. When the
progress bar reaches 60 second mark, the RF transmission
automatically returns to the normal operating power.

*Since the range of the radio waves isshort, if the model is too far from thetransmitter, control will be lost and themodel will crash.

Refer to P.44
59 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

S.Bus servo

S.BUS servo setting

An S.BUS(2) servo can memorize the channel andvarious settings you input. Servo setting can be
performed on the T16IZ screen by wiring the servo
as shown in the figure.
* With some S.BUS(2) servos, there are some functions whichcannot be used. If a function cannot be used, the display
screen will change. (Only the function which can be used bya servo is displayed.)* After reading completion, with connection of the above
figure, if a stick is moved, servo operation can be tested.

● Call the following setting screen by pressing the[S.BUS Servo] button in the System menu.

S.BUS/S.BUS2
Servo●Return to System menu

Procedure for changing S.BUS servo
setting

4. When multiple servos are connected change[INH] at the right side of the ID number on thescreen to [ACT] and enter the ID of the servo
you want to set.
5. Set each item. (Please see the next page.)
6. Press [Write]. The settings are changed.

1. Select [S.Bus servo] of the System menu.
2. Wire the servo as shown in the figure above.
3. Press [Read]. The ID and current setting ofthat servo are displayed.

● Servo ID number
If you use multiple S.BUS servos, only the desired
servo in the group can be set by entering the ID ofthat specific servo.
3-way hubor Y-harnesses

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

60 →

S.BUS/S.BUS2
Servo

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

S.BUS Servo Description of each parameter's function*There are functions that can and cannot be performed according to the servo type.

• ID
Displays the ID of the servo whose parameters are to be read. It cannot be changed.

• Channel
Channel of the S.BUS system assigned to the servo. Always assign a channel before use.

• Reverse
The direction in which the servo rotates can be changed.

• Soft Start
Restricts operation in the specified direction the instant the power is turned on. By using this setting, thefirst initial movement when the power is turned on slowly moves the servo to the specified position.

• Stop Mode
The state of the servo when the servo input signal is lost can be specified. The "Hold" mode setting holds
the servo in its last commanded position even if using AM or FM system.

• Smoother
This function changes smoothness of the servo operation relative to stick movement changes. Smoothsetting is used for normal flight. Select the "OFF" mode when quick operation is necessary such as 3D.

• Neutral Offset
The neutral position can be changed. When the neutral offset is large value, the servo's range of travel isrestricted on one side.

• Speed Control
Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple servos can be matchedwithout being affected by motor fluctuations. This is effective for load torques below the maximum torque.
However, note that the maximum speed will not exceed what the servo is capable of even if the servo's
operating voltage is increased.

• Dead band
The dead band angle at stopping can be specified.
[Relationship between dead band set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting → Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal
change.
Large Value Setting → Dead band angle is large and the servo does not operate at small signal changes.
(Note) If the dead band angle is too small, the servo will operate continuously and the current
consumption will increase and the life of the servo will be shortened.

• Travel Adjust
The left and right travels centered about the neutral position can be set independently.

• BoostThe minimum current applied to the internal motor when starting the servo can be set. Since a small
travel does not start the motor, it essentially feels like the dead band was expanded. The motor can be
immediately started by adjusting the minimum current which can start the motor.
[Relationship between boost set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting → Motor reacts to a minute current and operation becomes smooth.
Large Value Setting → Initial response improves and output torque increases. However, if the torque is toolarge, operation will become rough.

61 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

• Boost ON/OFF
OFF : It is the boost ON at the time of low-speed operation.(In the case of usual)ON : It is always the boost ON.(When quick operation is hope)• DamperThe characteristic when the servo is stopped can be set.
When smaller than the standard value, the characteristic becomes an overshoot characteristic. If the value
is larger than the standard value, the brake is applied before the stop position.
Especially, when a large load is applied, overshoot, etc. are suppressed by inertia and hunting may occur,depending on the conditions. If hunting (phenomena which cause the servo to oscillate) occurs eventhough the Dead Band, Stretcher, Boost and other parameters are suitable, adjust this parameter to avalue larger than the initial value.
[Relationship between damper set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting → When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur.
Large Value Setting → When you want to operate so that braking is not applied. However, it will feel likethe servo response has worsened.
(Note) If used in the hunting state, not only will the current consumption increase, but the life of the servo
will also be shortened.

• Stretcher
The servo hold characteristic can be set. The torque which attempts to return the servo to the target
position when the current servo position has deviated from the target position can be adjusted.
This is used when stopping hunting, etc., but the holding characteristic changes as shown below.
[Relationship between stretcher and servo operation]
Small Value Setting → Servo holding force becomes weaker.
Large Value Setting → Servo holding force becomes stronger.
(Note) When this parameter is large, the current consumption increases.

• Buzzer
When a servo is powered up without a transmitter signal, a buzzer sounds.
(When transmitter signal is lost, a buzzer sounds until the servo regains the signal. This is not unusual.
The transmitter has been turned OFF ahead of a servo power supply → The buzzer sound of about 1.25
Hz continues sounding as servo power supply end failure alarm.
(Do not insert or remove the servo connector while the receiver power is ON.
sound by incorrect recognition.)

A buzzer may＊ Buzzer sound is generated by vibrating the motor of a servo.
Since current is consumed and a servo generates heat, please do not operate the number more thanneeded or do not continue sounding a buzzer for a long time.

WARNING
While S.BUS servo writes, you aren't
supposed to remove a connection of a
servo and turn off a power supply of atransmitter.

■ Data of S.BUS servo is damaged and breaks down.

62 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Information

The program version and microSD card size are displayed. The User name,language and Unit system used by the system can also be changed.

This function registers the T16IZ user name and thelanguage displayed at proportional can be changed.

The Information screen displays the T16IZ system
program version information, microSD card
(memory size, card free size) information.

Telemetry numerical values can be displayed ineither metric or SAE (yard-pound) units.

*If a microSD card is not inserted, no memory card
information will be displayed.

2/2 : WEB Manual QR code

● Tap the [Information] button at the System menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to System menu

1/2

Telemetry Display Unit

[Metric]
Distance --- m (meter)
Speed --- km/h (kilometers per
hour)
Variometer --- m/s (meter per
second)Temperature --- ℃ (centigrade)[Yard]
Distance --- yard
Altitude --- feet
Speed --- mph (mile per hour)
Variometer --- fpm (ft per min)Temperature --- ℉ (fahrenheit)
Movement of a cursor of an input box

Back space (Input box)
Next page(Character list 2/4 - 4/4)

Fix and return to an
information screen.

An input box is reset

Input box

Shift key

Shift key

Registration of the user's name
T16IZ transmitter can register user's name.

How to register user's name
1. Turn on the power of the transmitter.
2. Select "user's name" and then the keyboard
will pop up.
3. You can use up to 15 characters as a user'sname. Use the keyboard on the screen toenter user's name.

The language displayed at proportional canbe changed. The initial setting is English, butdifferent languages can be selected.

63 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTSLINKAGE MENU
The Linkage menu is made up of functions which
perform model addition, model type selection, end
point setting, and other model basic settings.

Linkage menu functions table
Servo monitor

Displays the servo test and operation position

Model selectModel addition, call, deletion, copy, model name setting

Model type

Model type, wing type, tail type, swash type, selection

Servo reverse

Servo direction reversal

End point

Servo basic rate adjustment and limit setting

Servo speed

Servo speed setting

Sub-trim

Adjusts the neutral position of each servo

Function

Channel assignment of each function can be changed

Fail safe

Fail safe function and battery fail safe function setting

System type

System mode selection, link of a transmitter and receiver, telemetry mode selection

Trim setting

Control step amount and mode selection of the digital trim

Throttle cut

Stops the engine safely and easily

Idle down

Lowers the idle speed of the engine

Swash ring

Limits the swash plate travel to within a fixed range. (helicopter only)

Swash

Swash AFR and linkage correction function (helicopter only except swash type H-1)

Stick alarm

Can be set so that an audible alarm sounds when the throttle stick reaches the set position.

Timer

Timer setting

Function name

Function name can be changed

SensorVarious telemetry sensors setting

Telemetry

Displays various data sent from the receiverTele.setting

Telemetry data log

TrainerStarts and sets the trainer system.

Warning setting

Mixing, throttle position warning reset

User menu setting

Original menu making

Date reset

Model memory set data reset (by item)● Tap the [Linkage menu] button in the Home
screen to call the setup screen shown below.
● Select the function
name and return to
the Home screen.

64 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Servo monitor

Servo Test & Graph Display / Displays servo positions.

This is used for testing servo movement. “Moving
Test” (repetition mode) and “Neutral Test” (fixed
position mode) are available.
The “Neutral Test” is good for finding the neutral
position of a servo horn.

In order to prevent any potential difficulties,
the servo test function will be inoperable, or
inaccessible, under certain conditions. Specifically,
the Servo Test function is not operational if theThrottle cut is ON in either airplane or helicopter
modes; or if the Throttle hold is ON in helicopter
mode.
Test mode change :OFF → Neutral → Moving● Select [Servo monitor] at the linkage menu andcall the setup screen shown below.

＜ or ＞● Long press the [U.MENU/
MON.] button in the
Home screen to call the
setup screen shown.

●Return to Home orLinkage menu
Each channel movement can be checked.

[Moving]: Mode which repeats operation ofeach servo[Neutral]: Mode which locks each servo in theneutral position

Select the [OFF] or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button → Testing is
stoppedWARNING

Don't set a servo test mode when thedrive motor is connected and the engine
has been started.

■Inadvertent rotation of the motor or acceleration of the engine
is extremely dangerous.

65 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Model selectThe Model selection function performs model addition, call,deletion, copy, and model name setting.

This function is used to load the settings of thedesired model into the T16IZ’s memory.
The settings may be selected from either thetransmitter’s built-in memory. Remember that up to
30 model memories are available in the transmitter.
The model data of the microSD card is for storage.
microSD card model data cannot be called directlyfrom the transmitter. The name of the model stored
in the transmitter and the microSD card may bechanged. This can be very useful to tell different
models settings apart. Each model name can be as

long as 15 characters, and the model name always
appears in the display screen.
The Copy function is used to copy one set of model
data into a second memory within the transmitterand the microSD card. It may be used for gettinga head-start on setting up models with almost thesame settings (only differences need to be modified,instead of entering the complete model fromscratch). Also, this function may be used to make a
backup copy of a model setup before any changes
are made.

● Select [Model select] at
the linkage menu andcall the setup screen
shown below.

＜ or ＞● Tap the [Model select]button in the Home
screen to call the setup
screen shown below.

●Return to Home orLinkage menu

● "Save to"[Internal]: transmitter
memory[SD card]: microSD card

Current model isgreen.

Model addition
1. Tap the [New] button.

2. Tap [Yes] to add the model. (When you wantto cancel model addition, tap [No].)*The added model is displayed in the model list.
*When a model is added, a receiver link is required.

66 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Model call

Model deletion

1. Tap the Internal or SD card. Select thelocation to which the desired model is to be
saved.

1. Tap the select model name or the model you
want to delete in the model list.
(The model currently selected cannot bedeleted.)2. Tap the [Delete] button.

Blue model would
be deleted.

2. Tap the desired model in the model list.
3. Tap the [Select] button.

3. Tap [Yes]. (When you want to stop model
deletion, tap [No].)

4. Tap [Yes] to call the model. (When you wantto cancel model call, press [No].)Blue model wasdeleted.

When using model data of T18SZ,
T16SZ, FX-36, FX-32
1.The microSD card in which the model data ofanother transmitter is saved is displayed on
the model select screen.
T18SZ →
FX-32 →
T16SZ
FX-36
2. Copy the model data of another transmitterto T16IZ. The data will be converted for T16IZ.
3. Select the converted model data.
*The model data converted for T16IZ cannot be used inanother transmitter.

67 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Model name change

Model copy

1. The model data chosen at current model
can be changed. The current model name,tap.
2. When [Rename] is tapped, a keyboard
appears on the screen.

1. The model data chosen at current model
can be copied. The current model name,tap.

Current model (green)is chosen (blue).

Current model (green)is chosen (blue).

3. Enter the model name from this keyboard.

2. Tap the "Copy" button and tap thedestination button and select the copy
storage destination. (Internal or SD card)*Up to 15 characters can be input at the model name.

When you are done
renaming, tap Model name.

3. When [Internal]or [SD card] is tapped,
copying is executed.

Completion of rename

WARNING
Never launch the Model Selection function
while the engine is starting or the motor drive
wiring is connected.

■ Careless spinning of propellers or rotors is extremely
dangerous.

WARNING
Carefully check that the aircraft to be used andthe model selected match up.

■ Using a model which does not match the aircraft runs
the risk of the aircraft flying out of control and crashing.
Perform a careful operations check prior to flight.

add new copied model*If there is no model with the same name in the copy
destination, the name of the copied model is saved. If there
is a model of the same name, a number is added at the endof the model name and the model is copied. You can change
the name later.
*Indication date : When the model data is copied, the creation
date for the current model is recorded.
*T16IZ can use model data of T16SZ, T18SZ, FX-36, FX-32.
Other transmitter model data is not available. However, if
the model data conversion function (described at the end of
this manual) is used, part of the model data of T14SG, FX22, T12K can be used.

68 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Model typeThis function selects the model type from among airplane, glider,helicopter, and multicopter.

Seven types of main wings (six types of flyingwing) and three types of tail wings are available
for airplanes. Eight swash types are available
for helicopters. Seven types of main wings andthree types of tail wings are available for gliders.
Functions and mixing functions necessary for eachmodel type are set in advance at the factory.
Note: The Model Type function automaticallyselects the appropriate output channels, control

functions, and mixing functions for the chosenmodel type.
When the Model Type Selection command isaccessed, all of the data in the active memory iscleared. Be sure that you don’t mind losing thisdata, or back it up to another memory using thecopying functions.
(The display screen is an example. The screen
depends on the model type.)● Select [Model type] at the linkage menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
●Return to LinkagemenuModel type selection
1. Model type selection [Model icon], tap.
2. Set the Model type, Wing type(Airplane/
Glider), Tail type(Airplane/Glider), or Swash
type(Helicopter) by using the appropriate
button.
3. Set the type you choose by tapping[Enter]→[Yes] at the confirmation screen.
(When you want to cancel model typeselection, tap [No].)● When a data change will occur, the confirmation
screen of data initialization menu will be displayed.
A push on [yes] will initialize data and allow changes.
A push on [no] will stop data changes.

2. [Yes], tap
1. [Enter], tap

69 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Set the type you
choose by tapping.

Airplane/Glider : Choose thewing type and tail.

Helicopter : Choose theswash type.

70 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Servo Reverse

Use to reverse the servo throw direction.

Servo Reverse changes the direction of anindividual servo’s response to a control stick
movement.
For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the section
on Swash AFR before reversing any servos. With
CCPM helicopters, always complete your servo
reversing prior to any other programming. If you
use pre-built Airplane/Glider functions that control
multiple servos, it may be confusing to tell whether
the servo needs to be reversed or a setting in thefunction needs to be reversed. See the instructions
for each specialized function for further details.
Always check servo direction prior to every flightas an additional precaution to confirm proper model
memory, hook ups, and radio function.

WARNING
Before a flight, always check that yourmodel's servo operation, the directionof control surfaces, and switch setup
are correct.
Default setting of the throttle/motor
channel is always reverse.

● Tap the [Servo reverse] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.
Tap the channel you
wish to reverse.

●Return to Linkage menu

(The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.)

Servo reversing procedure
After setting up a new model, be sure to define all
special menus. Be sure that all servos are plugged
into the proper receiver channels. Now, determine
whether you need to reverse any channels bymoving each stick and observing the corresponding
movement in the model’s controls.

Tap the “Yes”→ Reverse

1. Tap the desired channel’s setting button tochoose the proper direction for the servo.
2. Tap “Yes” in the next screen.
3. Repeat for each servo needing reversal.
When done, tap “Servo reverse” to return to
the Linkage menu.

71 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

End point

Sets the travel, limit point.

The End point function adjusts the left and right
servo throws, generates differential throws, and willcorrect improper linkage settings.

30 ～
140%

The travel rate (normal full stick movement at highrates) can be varied from 30% to 140% in eachdirection on channels 1 to 16. Also, the limit point(how far the servo travels when a mix is involved)
where servo throw stops may be varied from 0% to155%.

● Tap the [End point] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup
screen shown below.

Travel rate

Limit point●Return to
Linkage menu

30 ～
140%

Next pageCh7-16

Tap the values you
wish to adjust andvalue input buttons
will appear on-screen.

Left / Top

Right / Bottom

Indicates the current
direction of the stick, etc.
(The display screen is an example. The screen depends on the model type.)

Servo travel adjustment

Limit point adjustment

1. Tap the travel button of the channel you
want to set. Value input buttons appear on
the screen.
2. Use these buttons to adjust the rate.
●Initial value: 100%
●Adjustment range: 30%~140%
3. Repeat the procedure above for each rate.

1. Tap the limit button of the channel you want
to set.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the limit
point.
●Initial value: 135%
●Adjustment range: 0%~155%
3. Repeat this procedure for each limit point.

72 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Servo speed

Sets the speed of each servo.

The Servo speed setting is used to set the servo
delay for each channel, from channel l to channel
16. The system uses the programmed speed (delay)
to slow down servo position changes. The Servo

speed setting can be varied from 0 to 27 in eachchannel.

（First）0 ～ 27（Slowly）● Tap the [Servo speed] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Linkage menu

Servo speed setting

3. Repeat this procedure for each channel.

1. Tap the speed button of the channel you
want to set.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the
servo speed.
●Initial value: 0●Adjustment range: 0~27 (steps)

To close this screen, tap the [Servo speed]
button.

Sub-trim

Setting of neutral position of each servo.

The Sub-Trim function is used to set the servo
neutral position, and may be used to make fineadjustments to the control surface after linkages

and pushrods are hooked up. When you begin to set
up a model, be sure that the digital trims are set totheir center position.

● Tap the [Sub-trim] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Linkage menu

Sub-trim adjustment
1. Tap the trim display part of the channel you
want to adjust.
Value input buttons appears on the Sub-trim
menu screen.

2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the subtrim.
●Initial value: 0●Adjustment range: -240~+240 (steps)*See above

3. Repeat this step for each channel.

73 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Function

Channel assignment for each function can be changed to suit your needs.

When you select model and wing (swash) types,
you will find that the optimized combinations ofservo output channels and functions have been
already preset. If you would like, on the functionsetting screen of the linkage menu, you can freelychange combinations of servo output channels,
functions (aileron, elevator, etc), and input
controllers (sticks, switches, trim levers and trim
switches). You can also assign the same function tomultiple servo output channels such as assigningelevator function to CH2 and CH3.

DG1, DG2 (switch channels)

These two channels can be used as switch (On/Off) channels. You can freely change combinations
between servo output channels and input controllers(sticks, switches, trim levers and trim switches).
Channel restrictions by a System TypeFASSTest 18CH---16 CH+2 Switch
FASSTest 12CH---10 CH+2 Switch
FASST MULTI ---16 CH+2 Switch
FASST 7CH--- 7 CHS-FHSS--- 8 CH
T-FHSS---16 CH+2 Switch● Tap the [Function] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu

Function change

Operation control change

1. Tap the function button of the channel you
want to change to call the Function select.

1. Tap the control button of the channel you
want to change. A control select screen(stick, switch, knob, trim lever, etc.) isdisplayed.

2. Select the function you want to change.
2. Select the control you want to operate.

*The same control can be assigned to multiple channels.

74 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Trim change
1. Tap the trim button to call the trim setup
screen.

H/W reverse
2. The following items can be set at the trim
setup screen.
● Hardware setting (Selection of switch, etc.
which controls trim)● Rate setting● Trim mode setting
Normal mode: Normal trim (linear) operation
ATL mode: ATL operation mode. (Works at only one
end of operation) Reverse is also possible.
Center mode: Maximum change near center by
center trim operation (Does not change at end of
the stick movement)This function reverses the operation signal of the
sticks, switches, trim levers, and knobs.
Note: This setting reverses the actual operation
signal, but does not change the display of theindicators on the display. Use the Normal mode aslong as there is no special reason to use the reverse
mode.

The Motor function is used when switching the
motor ON/OFF (mostly for motor gliders). For
most EP planes, the throttle can be left as-is whencontrolling the motor by stick. This means that thevarious throttle-related functions are usable via
motor control.

Tap the channel you
wish to reverse.
Tap the “Yes”→ H/W reverse

75 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Fail safe

Sets the servos' operating position when transmitter signals can nolonger be received or when the receiver battery voltage drops.

The Fail safe function is used to set up positions
that the servos will move to in the case of radio
interference. Defines servo position when signals arelost and when receiver battery voltage becomes low.
You may set either of two positions for each channel:
Hold, where the servo maintains its last commanded
position, or fail safe, where each servo moves toa predetermined position. You may choose either
mode for each channel.
The T16IZ system also provides you with anadvanced battery monitoring function that warns
you when the receiver battery has only a little
power remaining. In this case, each servo is moved
to the defined failsafe position. The battery failsafe
may be released by operating a predefined control
on the transmitter (default is throttle). Do notcontinue to fly. Land as soon as possible. Remember,
if the predefined control suddenly moves to a

position you did not command, land at once andcheck your receiver battery.
Do not continue to fly. Land as soon as possible.
Defines servo position when signals are lost andwhen receiver battery voltage becomes low.

WARNINGFor safety, always set the fail safe functions.

■Especially set the throttle channel fail safe function so that the
servo moves to the maximum slow side for airplanes and to theslow side from the hovering position for helicopters. Crashingof the model at full high when normal radio waves cannot bereceived due to interference, etc., is very dangerous.

■If fail safe is reset by throttle stick movement, the fail safe
may be mistaken as an engine malfunction and will be resetat low throttle and the model will continue to fly. If you haveany doubts, immediately land.

● Tap the [Fail safe] button in the Linkage menu to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu

Fail safe setting procedure
Decide which channels you want to go to preset
positions, and which ones you want to maintaintheir last commanded position. To select the failsafe mode you wish to set, use the F/S button. Thisbutton toggles between the two modes. (Hold, F/S)
F/S mode setting:
1. Tap the F/S button of the channel you want
to set, and set that channel to the [F/S]mode.
2. Hold the corresponding stick, control, slider,or other control in the position you want the
servo to move to when the fail safe functionis activated, and tap the F/S position button.
That position is displayed in percentage.
*When you want to return that channel to the Hold mode, tap
the [F/S] button again.

Battery fail safe setting procedure
To select the B.F/S mode, tap the [B.F/S] button.
Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between[OFF] and [B.F/S].
B.F/S setting:

1. Tap the [B.F/S] button of the desired channel
to set it to the B.F/S mode.
2. Hold the corresponding stick, VR, slider,or other control in the position you want
the servo to move to when the battery failsafe function is activated, and tap the F/S
position button. This position is displayed inpercentage.

*When you want to return that channel to OFF, tap the [B.F/S]
button again.

Battery Fail safe release function
This function releases the predefined control fromits held position after indicating that your receiverbattery is low.
1. Enter the control setting screen by tapping
the Battery F/S release button. Now, you may
choose whether moving the throttle resets
the condition, or select a stick or switch todeactivate it. To set a desired throttle release
position, move the throttle stick to the point
at which you wish the B.F/S to be released.

76 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

System type

System mode setting, Receiver link

*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.

System Type selection

The T16IZ is for 2.4 GHz only. The system canbe changed from among 6 choices: FASSTest
18CH, FASSTest12CH, FASST MULTI, FASST
7CH, T-FHSS, S-FHSS. It is FASSTest18CH andFASSTest12CH which can be chosen by R7108SB
set. The method of selection is on the next page.
*If you change the System type, other model data is not reset.
*After any change, remember to test the model and fully
check servo direction and motion.
*Analog servos cannot be used with the R7108SB in the
FASSTest12CH mode.

Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 18CH )Dual receivers can be linked with the T16IZ.
Two receivers are recognized individually by ID
numbers. For example, in R7108SB, CH output
setting function is used, by setting the first as as"1-8CH", and setting the second as "9-16CH".
Two sets of receivers can be used as a set in themodel, allowing you 16 channels. Separate fail-safe
voltage can be set to each receiver.
However, telemetry cannot be used for the 2ndreceiver.

● Select [System type] in the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkagemenu

Telemetry function (FASSTest /T-FHSS mode only)

To use the telemetry function, set “Telemetry” to“ACT”.
Receiver linking

The receiver will only be controlled (without being
affected by other transmitters) by the transmitter it
is linked to. When using a receiver other than one
purchased as a set, linking is necessary.
Moreover, a re-link is required when a new modelis added by model selection, and at the time ofsystem type change.
Linking method

P.41

Cases when linking is necessary:
・When using a receiver other than the initial setting.
・When the communication system was changed.
(FASSTest18CH ↔ FASSTest12CH etc. )・When a new model was created by model
selection.

DL Interval (FASSTest  mode only)

When a telemetry function is enabled, the receiving
interval (down-link interval) of sensor data can bechanged.
If a DL interval is increased, the response of thesensor data display becomes slower, but stick
response will improve.

Battery fail-safe voltage setup (FASSTest /T-FHSS
mode only)

The voltage at which battery fail-safe activates canbe set when you link. (3.5-8.4 V) The receiver
memorizes the setting as it was at link.
Since power consumption varies with battery type,servos and condition, please select the fail-safe
activation voltage for your own model.

77 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

CRSF Protocol for TBS
T16IZ has been made compatible with the CRSF
(TBS) protocol.
● Call page 2/2 from the [System type] menu.

*Bidirectional communication function of CRSF is not supported.
*When using CRSF, the S.BUS servo setting function and[Reload] [Register] [Change slot] functions cannot be used.
When setting S.BUS servo and sensor, set CRSF to INH.

WARNING
Futaba is not responsible for damage
sustained by combination withparts other than Futaba Genuine
equipment.

Tap the "CRSF" button to [ON]. A signal
conforming to the CRSF standard is
output from the S.BUS setting connector(S.I/F) of the transmitter.

System type

■ FASSTest 18CH --- FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up
to 18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) can be used.

■ FASSTest 12CH --- FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display. Up to
12 channels (linear10+ON/OFF2) can be used. Telemetry Sensor cannot be used,
but the response speed is faster than that of the 18CH mode.
• Analog servos cannot be used with the R7108SB in the FASSTest 12CH mode.

■ FASST MULTI---FASST-MULTI system receiver mode. Up to 18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2)
can be used.

■ FASST 7CH--- FASST-7CH system receiver mode. Up to 7 channels can be used.

■ T-FHSS Air■ S-FHSS--- T-FHSS system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up to
18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) can be used.
--- S-FHSS system receiver mode. Up to 8 channels can be used.

*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.

78 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Trim setting

Digital trim settings

This function adjusts the digital trim's control stepamount and operation mode (T1-T4).

When the flight conditions are set, the trim
operation can be coupled with any of the conditions
selected through combination mode.

● Select [Trim setting] at the linkage menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
●Return to LinkagemenuControl step amount setting
1. To set the control step amount, first tap thescreen to the data input mode.
Set the control step amount by tapping the" ▲▲ " " ▲ " " ▼▼ " " ▼ " button.
Initial value: 4Adjustment range: 1~200

Separate/combination mode selection[Comb.]: Combination mode. The trim data
are reflected at all the flight conditions.
[Separ.]: Separate mode. Trim adjustment foreach flight condition.

(When the value is tapped, the control stepamount is reset to the initial value.)*When the value is made large, the change per step becomeslarger.

79 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Throttle cut

Stops the engine safely and easily.

Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop theengine, by flipping a switch with the throttle stick at
idle. The action is not functional at high throttle to
avoid accidental dead sticks. The switch’s locationand direction must be chosen, as it defaults to " －－ ".

Tapping this will change
INH to either OFF or ON
and activated.

● Tap the [Throttle cut] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu

The yellow line is thecut position. Whenthe cut switch is ON,
the throttle will moveto this position.

This is the throttle cut
position. Tapping thiswill display value input
buttons on-screen. Set
the engine stop position.
Tapping this will pull up the
hardware selection screen.
Select the throttle cut switch
and ON-OFF direction.

Throttle cut setting procedure
1. Tap the "INH" button.
2. Throttle cut function switch setting:
Tap the "--" button to call the <Hardware
select> screen, and then select the switch
and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual.)
3. Throttle cut position setting:
Tap the cut position button. Value input
buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to adjust the cut
position rate.

This indicates the throttle stick's current
position. Throttle cut will only function
when the throttle stick is more than 1/3rd
into the slow throttle range.

●Initial value: 17%●Adjustment range:（LOW）0%~50%（Middle）*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the rate until the engine
consistently shuts off.

To exit the setting, tap the [Throttle cut]
button.

80 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Idle down

Lowers the engine idling speed.

The Idle down function lowers the engine's idle
by flipping a switch with the throttle stick at idle.
The action is not functional at high throttle to avoid
accidental dead sticks. The switch’s location anddirection must be chosen, as it defaults to " －－ ".
● Select [Idle down] at the linkage menu
and call the setup screen shown below.

Tapping this will change
INH to either OFF or ON
and activated.

●Return to Linkage menu

This is the idle down
throttle position. Tapping
this will display value input
buttons on-screen. Set theengine's max. low position.
Range:（↑）-100 ～ +100（↓）

Pressing and holding avalue will reset it to 0.

Tapping this will pull up the
hardware selection screen.
Select the idle down switch
and ON-OFF direction.

This is the current position bar for thethrottle stick. Throttle cut will only
function when the throttle stick is morethan halfway into the low throttle range.

Idle down setting procedure
1. Tap the "INH" button to activate the Idle
down function.
2. Idle down function switch setting:
Tap the "--" button to call the <Hardware
select> screen, and then select the switch
and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual.)

3. Offset rate setting:
Tap the offset rate button. Value input
buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to adjust the offset rate.
●Initial value: 0%●Adjustment range: -100%~100%*(-)becomes an idle up.
To exit the setting, tap the [Idle down]
button.

Landing

Idling, lower

Offset rate

81 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Swash ring

Limits the swash travel within a fixed range to prevent linkage damage(Helicopter only)This function limits the travel of the swash plate toprevent linkage damage as the aileron and elevator
operation is used. It is useful for 3D heli setting.

●Tap the [Swash ring] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
Setting the function to"ACT" will display theswash ring and [Rate]
percentage.

●Return to
Linkage menu
The movement range
display shows control
input for elevator andaileron direction.
The marker represents
the stick's position.

Swash ring setting procedure
1. Push the Swash ring button on the linkagemenu.
2. Push ACT/INH button to activate.

*The movement area monitor shows the current aileron andelevator values and limit ranges by the yellow circle.

3. Adjust the rate to the maximum amount ofswash plate decline.
*The swash movement is limited within the circle.

Adjustment range: 50 - 200%.

82 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

SwashSwash operation linkage correction function (helicopter only, except
swash type H-1).

Neutral Point

At your linkages, if the servo horn deviates froma perpendicular position at neutral, the linkage
compensation functions in this menu may notcompensate effectively. To correct this use theneutral point function. This will move the neutral
point of the servos to the actual perpendicular
position. However, this adjustment changes only
the axis point of the compensation functions in thismenu, and does not affect the neutral position ofother functions.
Swash AFR

Swash AFR function reduces/increases/reverses therate (travel) of the aileron, elevator and collective
pitch functions, by adjusting or reversing the
motion of all servos involved in that function, only
when using that function.

Mixing Rate

This compensation mixing is used to correct thetendency of the swash-plate for each control. The
following compensation mixing is possible: PIT
to AIL, PIT to ELE, AIL to PIT, ELE to AIL, andELE to PIT (HR3 mode.) It adjusts the swashplate to operate correctly for each control using thecorresponding compensation mixing.
Linkage Compensation

This compensation mixing is used to correct thetendency of the swash-plate for pitch control at low
pitch and high pitch.
Speed Compensation

This function is used to cancel the reaction that is
generated by the difference of the operation amountof each servo when the swash-plate moves.

● Select [Swash] at the linkage menu and call the
setup screen shown below.
●Return to Linkage menu

83 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Neutral point setting procedure*Becomes the compensation reference point.
*Adjusting the servo horn so that the neutral point position isnear the 50% position makes the mixing amount small.

1. Hold the servo horn at a right angle to thelinkage rod, and then tap the [Enter] button
and read the actual neutral point.
*The neutral point is displayed on the screen.

After reading this neutral point, use othercompensation functions to make further
adjustments.
To exit the setting, tap the [Swash] button.

Swash AFR setting procedure
Adjust so that the specified operation
amount is obtained by aileron, elevator, andpitch operation.
1. Tap the button of the AFR rate to be
adjusted. Value input buttons appear on thescreen.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the AFR
rate.
Initial value: +50%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%+or- the direction of operation changes.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

Mixing rate setting procedureHR-3 is described as an example. The mixing
applied in other swash modes is different, but
the setting procedure is the same.
1. Set the throttle stick to the set neutral point.
Adjust the length of the linkage rod so thatthe swash plate is horizontal at this position.
*A little adjustment using sub trim should be OK.
*Adjust so that pitch operation when the pitch curveis straight is maximum.
2. Adjust the AIL->PIT amount so there is nointerference in the elevator or pitch direction
when the aileron stick is moved to the left
and right.
*Adjust the left and right sides separately.
3. Adjust the ELE->AIL and ELE->PIT amounts sothere is not interference in the aileron or pitch
direction when the elevator stick is moved
up and down.
*Adjust the up and down sides separately.
4. Adjust the PIT->AIL and PIT->ELE amounts sothat the swash plate is horizontal when thethrottle stick is set to maximum slow and fullhigh.
*Adjust the slow and high sides separately.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

Linkage correction setting procedure*Set the linkage compensation after setting the mixing
rate.
*This function compensates for elevator interferenceby aileron operation or aileron interference by
elevator operation at Low pitch and Hi pitch atcollective pitch (HR3, etc.) control.
1. Set the throttle stick to the maximum slow
position. Move the aileron stick to the left andright and adjust the aileron compensation
amount so that interference in the elevatoror pitch direction at that time is minimal.
*The left and right sides can be adjusted separately.
*If the interference increases when the compensation
amount is increased, make the compensation
direction "-".
2. Adjust the elevator compensation amountso that the interference in the aileron or pitch
direction when the elevator stick is moved
up and down is minimal.
3. Perform aileron and elevator compensation
similarly for the throttle stick full high side.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

Speed compensation setting procedure
1. Set the throttle stick to the neutral point
position. Move the elevator stick quickly andadjust the speed compensation amount sothat the interference in the pitch direction isminimal.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.
Notes:
If the linkage is too long or short, correctcompensation will not be applied. Correct
this before continuing. The pitch angle
changes after any adjustment. Reset thepitch angle when actually flying after
compensation processing.

84 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Stick alarm
An alarm (single beep) can be sounded at the
specified throttle stick position.
●Alarm function ON/OFF can be set by switch.
Tapping this will change
INH to ON and activated.

If the throttle stick
reaches the yellow
line, an alarm willsound.

●Return to Linkage menu

This is the throttle stick
alarm position. Push thethrottle stick to the desired
position and tap the value.
Range:（Low）0 ～ 100（High）

This is the current
position display bar forthe throttle stick.
Tapping this will pull up the hardware selection
screen. Select the switch and ON-OFF direction if
turning the function ON-OFF by switch.

If the throttle stick
reaches the desired
position , an alarm(single beep) willsound.

85 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

TimerTimer setting

The Timer function may be set forany desired time, i.e. engine run time,
specified times for competitions, etc.
Two independent timers are provided
for your use. The timers are stored
independently with each model, meaningthat when you switch between model
setups, the timer associated with the newmodel is brought up automatically.
The timers may be set to start and stopfrom the motion of any switch or stick.
You may set the ON and OFF directions
freely. Each timer has a capacity of up to
59 minutes 59 seconds.

Each timer may be set for count-down or count up operation
with a target time.
If a target time is set and the timer reaches the set time, abuzzer sound for each count is generated.

Last twenty seconds Last ten seconds Target timeTime：

Alarm :One shortbeep

Two short
Also
beeps

● Select [Timer] at the linkage menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

A Buzzer or Speech
can be chosen●Return to
Linkage menu

Constant: The alarm
does not stop

Elapsed: Minute-by-minutealarm starting from 00:00

Remainder : Minute-byminute alarm counting downfrom a designated time

[Inhibit] → [Type1-4]
If it carries out like this,a vibration function
will work.

beep

Continue counting
with displaying a
minus (-) sign.

One time: Stop thealarm at once

OFF: Turning the power OFF and switching models will reset the timer.
ON: Previous timer is put into memory and will restart from where it stopped.
[Start/Stop] → Home screen
A timer on the home screen starts and stops its countdown
directly from there when tapped. Tapping and holding thedisplay will reset the timer.

Timer 1Up timer/Down timer selection

1. Tap the mode button and select the type oftimer.
2. Timer time setting.
Tap the Mode minutes or seconds button.
Value input buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to set the timer time.

Timer 2Start/Stop/Reset switch setting

1. Tap the Start/Stop/Reset SW "--" button tocall the <Switch> screen, and then select theswitch and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual. The timer switches
can be set for each condition.)86 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Integration Timer
INT (integration) Timer is the function which changes progress of a timer according to the locationof the throttle stick. When the throttle stick is raised for faster speed, the speed of the timer usually
increases. With the throttle stick at mid-range speed, the timer speed decreases (to 50%). When thethrottle is positioned at low end, the timer's progress stops. It's possible to set it in the time whichfits power consumption of your fuselage.
*The consumption of the battery/fuel is different depending on the conditions, so use an INT Timer as
reference.
*The INT (integration) time is different from the actual elapsed time.

When a throttle stick is thehigh side, the speed of thetimer usually increases.

High

When a throttle stick is
middle-speed, the timer
speed decreases (by 50%).

MiddleWhen a throttle stick is low,timer progress stops.

Low● Select [Timer] at the linkage menu and call the setup
screen shown below.
INT Time

Nomal TimerTap

INT time (%)

TH% : Integration Timer

87 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Function name

Function name can be changed

The name of the spare functions (Auxiliary 1-8)
can be changed for the full name (10 characters) orfor the abbreviated name (4 characters).

● Tap the [Function name] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Linkage menu

Function name change method
1. Select [Function name] from the Linkagemenu and tap the screen.
2. The Function name setup screen is displayed.
3. When the function whose name is to bechanged is selected and the screen istapped, a modification screen is displayed.
4. Select the function to be renamed andselect [Rename] and tap the screen. A
character input screen is displayed. Input thefunction name.

6. The function name may be displayed in 10
characters or 4 characters, depending on
the setup screen. For 4-character display,
input the function name as required.

5. When [Reset] is selected and the screen isheld down, the function name is set to theinitial state function name.

88 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry system
This screen displays and sets the various information from the receiver. An alarm and vibration can begenerated depending on the information. For example, a drop in the voltage of the receiver battery housedin the aircraft can be reported by an alarm.
● This function can only be used in the FASSTest18CH mode and T-FHSS mode. The FASST/S-FHSS mode cannot use
telemetry.
● FASSTest12CH mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display.

● Telemetry sensors sold separately can be mounted in the aircraft to display a variety of information. (Receiver voltage
does not require a sensor.)● The telemetry function cannot be used if the telemetry mode of the parameters is not ACT.

● FASSTest18CH : When 2 receivers are used with 1 transmitter, the telemetry cannot be used for the 2nd receiver.
● T-FHSS/FASSTest12CH : When 2 receivers are used with 1 transmitter, the telemetry function cannot be used.

● If the transmitter and receiver are linked, but the receiver's ID is not recorded in the transmitter's memory, the telemetryfunction cannot be used.
● Turning OFF the receiver after use will cause the telemetry data just prior to this to be displayed. (Even when thereceiver's power is turned OFF, the receiver voltage is not 0.0 V.)

Viewing the receiver voltage.

Setting is unnecessary. When menu telemetryis listened to, the voltage appears.

Viewing the drive battery
voltage.

CA-RVIN-700 and wiring work are necessary.

P.96

Using various optional
telemetry sensors.

Optional telemetry sensors are necessary.
T16IZ setting is unnecessary.

P.91

Using several telemetry
sensors of the same type.

Setting by "sensor" in the menu is necessary.
(Register is necessary.)

P.92

Setting alarms from thetelemetry information.

Setting by "Telemetry" in the menu isnecessary.

Viewing the telemetry data

P.89

P.95 ～ 112＜ Home display ＞

Receiver → Transmitter. The reception of the signal
from the receiver to the transmitter is shown. This
does not affect flight.
Receiver voltage andExt voltage display

CAUTION
Do not stare at or set the transmittersetting screen while flying.

■ Losing sight of the aircraft during flight is very
dangerous.
■ When you want to check the information
during flight, call the telemetry screen
before flight and have the screen checked bysomeone other than the operator.

89 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Home
display
16 of telemetry data is displayed

HOME/EXIT is pushed*Be aware that pressing and holding this activates the key lockYou can choose
which type of sensor
to display for four
displays. Tap the sensor
type.

For some sensor types,
you can choose thedisplay item. Tap toselect.

T16IZ

Fuse

Info

SignalTelemetry Schematic
Info

CA-RVIN-700

with external power
input must be less than 70V

Drive battery

Receiver

BranchMotor
Controller

Drive battery voltage isdisplayed at the transmitter.

Battery voltage isdisplayed at the transmitter.

Info

S.BUS2
port

Switch

Info

Hub

Info

Hub

Terminal box

Temperature
SensorSlot 1

RPM
SensorSlot 2

AltitudeSensorSlot 3 ～ 5

Voltage
SensorSlot 6 ～ 7GPSSensorSlot 8 ～ 15***Sensor***Sensor

Hub

Info

90 →

Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 31

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

SensorVarious telemetry sensors settingThis screen registers the telemetry sensors usedwith the transmitter. When only one of a certain
type of sensor is used, this setting is unnecessary
and the sensor can be used by simply connecting itto the S.BUS2 port of the transmitter.
When using 2 or more of the same kind of sensor,
they must be registered here.
● Tap the [Sensor] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.

Slot Number[What is a slot?]

Servos are classified by CH, but sensors areclassified in units called “slot”. There are slots from
No. 1 to No. 31.
Altitude sensors, GPS sensors and other data
sensor units may use multiple slots.
When using a sensor which uses two or moreslots, the required number of slots is automaticallyassigned by setting up a start slot.
When 2 or more of the same kind of sensor areused, the sensors themselves must allocate unused
slots and memorize that slot.

Registered sensor

Sensor ID : Multiple usage of sensorsof the same type requires an ID
be input. Tapping this will allow
for manual input, but see the next
page about how to perform autoregistration via sensor registration.

Tap the slot to display
sensors which can be used
for the start slot. Tap toregister the sensor.

This is what displays when no
sensor is registered in a slot.
Tapping the slot and selecting"-----------" will erase whatever was
registered there, freeing up theslot.

● As shown in the table below, an altimeter requires 3 contiguous slots and a GPS sensor
requires 8 contiguous slots. The GPS (SBS-01/02G) start slots are 8, 16, and 24.

＜ Assignable slot ＞*Altimeter, GPS, and other sensors that display a large amount of data require multiple slots.
*Depending on the type of sensor, the slot numbers that can be allocated may be limited.

TEMP (SBS-01T/TE)
RPM (SBS-01RM/RO/RB)
Airspeed (SBS-01TAS)

The required numberof slots
1 slot1 slot1 slotVoltage (SBS-01V)

2 slots

Altitude (SBS-01/02A)

3 slots

Current (SBS-01C)

3 slots

SensorS.BUS Servo sennsor（SBS01S)
GPS(SBS-01/02G)
EM-100 (O.S. ENGINE)
TEMP125-F1713

8 slots
12 slots
1 slotVARIO-F1712

2 slots

VARIO-F1672

2 slots

CURR-F1678

3 slots

GPS-F1675
Kontronik ESC
Castle TL0

8 slots
8 slots
8 slots

JetCat V1014 slots

PowerBox

16 slots

6 slots

The number which can be used as a start slot
1-31
1-31
1-31
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
1,2,8,9,10,16,17,18,
24,25,26
8,16,24
8,16
1-31
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
8,16,24
8,16,24
8,16,24
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,
18
8,16

91 →

Selling area

GlobalEuropeGO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Sensor：Reload

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

When using multiple sensors of the same typethe sensors must be registered in the transmitter.
Connect all the sensors to be used to the T16IZ asshown in the figure at the right and register them by
the following procedure. The ID of each sensor isregistered in the transmitter.
● Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.
●Return to
Linkage menu

Hub

Hub

SENSORSENSORSENSOR

Sensor : Register

SENSOR

1. Connect the sensor to the T16IZ as shown in the figure above.
2. Tap “Reload” on page 3/3 of the [Sensor] screen.
3. Tap “Reload”.
All the sensors are registered and can be used.

SENSOR

Reading all the sensors to be used

Hub

*It is not necessary to carry out
multiple battery connections likea T18MZ/T14SG.

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

This function registers an additional sensor.
Connect the sensor as shown in the figure at theright and register it by the following procedure.
The sensor ID is registered in the transmitter.
● Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.
●Return to
Linkage menu

SENSOR

Additional sensor registration
1. Connect the sensor to the T16IZ as shown in the figure above.
2. Tap “Register” on page 3/3 of the <Sensor> screen.
3. The sensor is registered and can be used.

displayed and registration cannot be
performed. Disable unused slots or
perform the following reload.

*When the number of slots needed in registration is insufficient, an error is

92 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Sensor : Change slot

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensorsof the same type.

This procedure changes the slot number of one
registered sensor.

● Call page 3/3 from the [Sensor] menu.
●Return to
Linkage menu

SENSOR● Tap the [Change slot] buttonin the Sensor screen to call the
setup screen shown below.

*For some transmitters (e.g., T6K), when the start slot of asensor is changed, the sensor cannot be used.

Sensor slot change
1. Connect the sensor to the T16IZ as shown in
the figure above.
2. Tap “Change slot” on page 3/3 of the<Sensor> screen.
3. Tap “Read”.
4. A sensor details screen appears.
5. The current start slot is displayed. To changea start slot, a ＋ ― button, tap.（Cannot be
set to a slot that cannot be allocated like thetable of all pages.）
6. Tap to the “Write”.

WARNING

Do not disconnect or turn transmitter
power OFF while telemetry sensor data
is being saved.

Sensor save data will be lost, resulting in
malfunction.

93 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry

Displaying data from the receiverThis screen displays your choice of data from thereceiver.
Also warnings can be activated regarding the data.
For example, if the receiver voltage drops, the user
can be warned by an alarm (and vibration).

● Tap the [Telemetry] button in the Linkage menu tocall the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Linkage menu

Tap page button toadvance to next page.
( The number of pages
changes with the numberof sensor registration.)

Various telemetry data
Start slot number

Choose the desired sensor and tap.

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Display Sensors
Default display sensors can only be used byconnecting the sensors to the receiver. For displayof other sensors or to use the same type of sensor in
multiple cases, either register them via the "Sensor"
option on the Linkage menu or allocate the sensors
to empty slots to have them display on the Telemetry
screen. Refer to the previous "Sensor" explanation
pages for how to do this.

94 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry: Receiver [Battery]In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver isdisplayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the settin, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

Displaying data from thereceiver battery voltage*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

● Tap the [Receiver] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
Receiver battery
voltage●Return to
Linkage menu

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0 V] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V"Vibrator" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

95 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry: Receiver [Ext. battery]
The EXT-VOLT screen will display the data fromthe EXT-battery output from the R7108SB receiver.
In order to use this function, it is necessary toconnect external voltage connector of the R7108SB
receiver to a CA-RVIN-700 or SBS-01V to thebattery you desire to measure the voltage of the
EXT-battery.

Displaying data from the EXT
battery voltage port

*CA-RVIN-700 must be installed in the aircraft.

You will be alerted by an alarm or vibration if thevoltage set by you is exceeded.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

● Tap the [Receiver] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu
Ext. battery
voltageMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0 V] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

"Vibrator" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

96 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry : Temperature

Displaying data from the temperature*A temperature sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
Temperature is a screen which displays/sets up*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
the temperature information from an optional
FASSTest12CH mode.
temperature sensor.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
The temperature of the model (engine, motor,
functions.
battery, etc.) which is flying can be displayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
● Tap the [Temperature] button in the Telemetry
screen to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu

Temperature

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
will show that an
alarm will sound when
the temperature rises
above the set value.
↓ A downward arrow
will show that an
alarm will sound when
the temperature drops
below the set value.

Sets the temperatureon which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alert set : Temperature warning
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [℃ ] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: ↑100℃ ↓0℃
Adjustment range: -20℃ ~200℃(↑Limit ≧ ↓Limit)"Vibrator" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

97 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry : RPM Sensor

Displaying data from the rpm

The RPM Sensor screen is used to set up an
optional rpm sensor and display the rotation
information it transmits.
The rotation of the model (engine, motor, etc.)
which is flying can be shown.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

*An rpm sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

● Tap the [ rpm sensor] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu

rpm

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when therpm rises above the set
value.
↓ A downward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when therpm falls below the set
value.

Sets the rpm on which
the alarm operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

"Magnet""Optics""Brushless motor"

SBS-01RM → Gear ratio 1.00~99.00
SBS-01RO → Blade
2~10
SBS-01RB → Pole
2~30

Alarm set : Over (Under) rotations

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [xxx rpm] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: ↑ 2,000 rpm ↓ 0 rpm
Adjustment range: 0 rpm~150,000 rpm(↑Limit ≧ ↓Limit)"Vibrator" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

98 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry : Altitude

Displaying data from the altitude*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

Altitude is a screen which displays / sets up the altitude
information from an optional altitude sensor or GPS sensor.
The altitude of the model which is flying can be known. If it
becomes higher (low) than preset altitude, you can be told by
alarm. Warning by vibration can also be chosen. Data whena power supply is turned on shall be 0 m, and it displays thealtitude which changed from there. Even if the altitude of an
airfield is high, that shall be 0 m and the altitude difference
from an airfield is displayed. This sensor calculates thealtitude from atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure
will get lower as you go up in altitude. Using this, thesensor will estimate the altitude. Please understand that anexact advanced display cannot be performed if atmosphericpressure changes in a weather situation.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

● Tap the [Altitude] button in the Telemetry screen tocall the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu

Altitude

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Sets the altitude
on which the alarm
operates.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thealtitude reaches above
your set value.

● If this is set to Mode1-4,
a rise and dive are told
by a different melody.

↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thealtitude reaches below
your set value.

Mode1: Little rise/dive→ Melody changes: sensitively

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Mode4: Big rise/dive→ Melody changes: insensible
Allows Melody to beturned ON or OFF.

First, the set of a reference is required.

Alarm set : Altitude

1. The model and transmitter to which thealtitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [xxx m] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: ↑200 m ↓-50 m
Adjustment range -500 m~+3,000 m(↑Limit ≧ ↓Limit)*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather
also at the same airfield. You should preset before a flight.

"Vibrator" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

99 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry : Altitude [Variometer]

Displaying data from thevariometer*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
VARIO is a screen which displays / sets up thestatus, the T16IZ incorporates a different melody
variometer information from an optional altitude
for ascent and descent. Additionally, depending
sensor or GPS sensor.
upon the rate of climb or descent, the tones vary toindicate whether or not the airplane is climbing or
The variometer of the model which is flying can bedescending at a rapid rate.
known.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting, an*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used inalarm and/or vibration will alert you.
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetry
To ensure that the pilot is aware as to the model's● Tap the [Variometer] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.

functions.

●Return to
Linkage menu
VariometerMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Sets the variometeron which the alarm
operates.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thevariometer reaches
above your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thevariometer reaches
below your set value.

● If this is set to Mode1-4,
a rise and dive are told
by a different melody.
Mode 1 : Little rise/dive→ Melody changes: sensitively

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

First, the set of a reference is required.

1. The model and transmitter to which thealtitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.
*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather
also at the same airfield. You should preset before a flight.

"Vibrator" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3Mode 4 : Big rise/dive→ Melody changes: insensible

Allows Melody to beturned ON or OFF.

Alert set : variometer

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [m/s] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: +1m
Adjustment range-50 m/s~+50 m/s(↑Limit ≧ ↓Limit)*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

100 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Vario Melody Setting

Tap the [Set] button

Current variometer*These settings can bemade for each sensor.

Next page

Deadband

Range

When the variometer is greaterthan this value, Vario melody is
not variable.
Setting range：
Offset value ～ +50 m/s

When the variometer is less than
this value, Vario melody is notvariable.
Setting range：-50 m/s ～ Offset value

Initial value：5.0 m/s

Initial value：-5.0 m/s

When the variometer is lessthan this value, Vario melody
is not output.
Setting range：
0 m/s ～ +50 m/s
Initial value：0.0 m/s

When the variometer isgreater than this value, Vario
melody is not output.
Setting range：-50 m/s ～ 0 m/s
Initial value：0.0 m/s

Offset[The relation of Vario Melody settings]

Range↑
Deadband↑Oﬀset

This is the changing point of climb and sink. When the variometeris greater than this value, Vario Melody is climb type. When thevariometer is less than this value, Vario Melody is sink type.
Setting range：Range ↑ setting value ～ Range ↓ setting value
Initial value：0.0 m/s

Deadband↓Range↓

101 →Fixed melody
Variable melody
Dead band（Not sound）

Variable melody
Fixed melody

Climb side
Discontinuous
soundsSink side
Continuous
soundsGO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

DelayThe output vario melody does not change during
the delay time. In other words, this is a minimum
time of Vario melody output.
Setting range：0.0 s，0.5 s，1.0 s，1.5 s
Initial value：0.0 s*This parameter is effective to all variometers.

[Vario Melody Delay]
Actually Variometer
0.0m/s

1.0m/s

3.0m/s

4.0m/s

2.0m/s-1.0m/s

Output Vario Melody
0.0m/s

1.0m/s

3.0m/s

4.0m/s

2.0m/s-1.0m/s

Delay time
1.0s

102 →

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry: Voltage [Battery]

Displaying data from the receiver battery voltage*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver isdisplayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the settin, an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

In this screen, the battery voltage is displayed. Inorder to use this function, it is necessary to connect
External voltage connector of R7108SB ⇔ SBS01V ⇔ Battery
SBS-01V measures two batteries. The power
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXTVOLT. The battery for receivers connected to 3Plines is displayed here.

● Tap the [Voltage] button in the Telemetry screen
to call the setup screen shown below.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

●Return to
Linkage menu

Battery voltage

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer,
Voice, and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using
the vibrator alarm. If using vibrator,choose one of the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0 V] item.
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲""▲▲" buttons.
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate isreset to the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return tothe original state, push the HOME/EXIT
button.
*Refer to the manual of SBS-01V for the details of
wiring.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.
Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

＜ Two examples of wiring are shown ＞
Two drive batteries are measured (R7108SB use)
Drive battery 1（EXT Battery)to S.BUS2
port

Drive battery 2（EXT Battery)

EXT Line

Normal Line

R7108SB

Receiver battery●Battery voltage measurement for receivers [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 1 is measured in an EXT port [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 2 is measured in an EXT line [SBS-01V use]

Two drive batteries and power supplies for servos are measured (R7108SB use)
Drive battery 1（EXT Battery)
Drive battery 2（EXT Battery)
Power supplies
for servos*SBS-01V measures two voltage. One corresponds to high voltages, such as a drive battery,with an EXT line. Another is a normal line and is measurement of the battery for receivers of aline connected to 3P connector, or the battery for servos.

EXT Line

SwitchNormal Line

to S.BUS2
port

Another power
supply Hub

R7108SB

Receiver battery
S.BUS2

servos103 →●Battery voltage measurement for receivers [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 1 is measured in an EXT port [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 2 is measured in an EXT line [SBS-01V use]
●The voltage for servos is measured in a power supply line [SBS-01V use]

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry: Voltage [Ext. battery]In this screen, the EXT battery voltage isdisplayed. In order to use this function, it isnecessary to connect External voltage connector of
R7108SB ⇔ SBS-01V ⇔ Battery
SBS-01V measures two batteries. The power
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXTVOLT.

Disp la ying da t a fro m t he EXT
battery voltage port

*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

● Tap the [Voltage] button in the Telemetry screen tocall the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu
Ext. battery
voltageMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm set
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap Limit [4.0 V].
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset tothe initial value.

"Vibrator" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

104 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry : GPS [Distance]

Displaying data from the Distance Screen

The Distance screen displays and sets altitude datafrom an SBS-01/02G GPS Sensor (sold separately),
and allows the distance to the airborne aircraft tobe read by the transmitter. When the aircraft flies
inside or outside the set distance, an alarm andvibration alerts the pilot.

*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mountand connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

● Tap the [GPS] button in the Telemetry screen to callthe setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu

Distance

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
distance reaches
above your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
distance reaches
below your set value.

Sets the distanceon which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference"
item. Sets the current aircraft position
as the starting point.

"Vibrator" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Altitude calculated as either straight line distance(slant) or surface distance on a map can also be
selected.

Type 1nt

Sla

Type 2

AltitudeType 3

Surface
Select <Slant> <Surface> to "Distance mode", tap thescreen.

105 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

First, the set of a reference is required.

Setting a "too close" alarm distance

2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.

2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.

1. The model and transmitter to which the GPS
sensor was connected are turned on.
*Now, the position of the present model was set to 0 m.

Setting a "too far" alarm distance

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap Limit [m].
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 1,000 m

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.

3. Tap Limit [m].
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 0 m
Adjustment range 0 m~3,000 m(↑Limit ≧ ↓Limit)*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset tothe initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

Adjustment range 0 m~3,000 m(↑Limit ≧ ↓Limit)*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is reset tothe initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

Telemetry
Data

Distance*Positioning time of GPS

When powered up, the SBS-01/02G begins toacquire GPS satellite data. This process cantake several minutes. Please do not move themodel during this process. During acquisition,
the LED on the SBS-01/02G will blink green;
after the satellite's signals have been acquired,
the LED will become solid green, and the GPS
signal strength display on the transmitter willshow three bars.
Moving the model before the satellites are fullyacquired will cause a delay in acquiring thesatellite signal.

106 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry : GPS [Speed]

Displaying data from the speed

The speed screen displays and sets the speed data from an *A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
SBS-01/02G (GPS sensor) sold separately.
The speed of the aircraft during flight can be displayed.
After flight, the maximum speed during flight can beviewed. Because this speed is based on position data froma GPS satellite, the ground speed is displayed instead of
air speed. Consequently, with a head wind, the displayed
speed decreases and with a tail wind, the displayed speed
increases.

*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mountand connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

● Tap the [GPS] button in the Telemetry screen to callthe setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Speed↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches below
your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the speed on
which the alarm
operates.

Reference and Distance mode work in conjunction with Distancediscussed on the previous two pages.

"Vibrator" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Alarm setting when speed increases

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the vibrator
alarm. If using vibrator, choose one of the three
types.
3. Tap Limit [xxx km/h].
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: ↑200km/h ↓0km/h
Adjustment range 0km/h~500km/h(↑Limit ≧ ↓Limit)*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the originalstate, push the HOME/EXIT button.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*Speed alarm precaution
Since the GPS speed sensor displays the ground speed, itcannot be used as a stall alarm. For example, an aircraft thatstalls at 50km/h will stall if the tailwind is 5km/h or greater
even through 55km/h is displayed by ground speed. In
addition, with an aircraft that will disintegrate in midflight at
400km/h at an over-speed alarm, when the headwind reaches
30km/h the airplane will disintegrate in midair due to overspeeding even at a ground speed of 370km/h.

107 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry : GPS [Altitude, Variometer, Position]*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

The Altitude, Variometer, Position screen displays
and sets the data from an SBS-01/02G (GPSsensor) sold separately.
*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mountand connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

● Select [GPS] in the Telemetry screen andaccess the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Altitude
Variometer

Refer to the former
page for a setup
about Altitude andVariometer.

This indicates thereceiving accuracy
from a GPS Satellite.
When three bars are
displayed, the GPS isready for use.

The position of the present
model is displayed.

Altitude
Variometer

position

108 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry : Servo sensor [Current]
The SBS-01S can monitor and display the in-flightcurrent, operating angle, and internal temperatureof up to two S.BUS2 servos.
If you forget to connect the servo wiring during
fuselage assembly, or the servo was disconnected,
an alarm can be activated at the transmitter.

*Servo sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

Tap here and go to theServo 2 settings page.
(Display and settingscontent is the same as
Servo 1.)

● Select [Servo sensor] in the Telemetry
screen and access the setup screen
shown below.
●Return to Linkage menu
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Tapping this willtake you to thesettings screen forthe current alarm

Tapping this and selecting"Buzzer" will cause the device
to sound an alarm when
servos are not connected.

Tapping this and selecting"Each type" will cause thedevice to vibrate when servos
are not connected.

When the Alarm or
Vibrator options areactivated, the servo
connection will
display.
*This alarm and display is limited to the S.BUS
servos connected to the servo sensors.
↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches below
your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the current on
which the alarm
operates.

Vibrator is choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

109 →Initial value: ↑ 10.0A ↓ 0.0A
Adjustment range 0.0A~10.0A( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry : Servo sensor [Temperature] [Angle]● Select [Servo sensor] in the Telemetry
screen and access the setup screen
shown below.

*Servo sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

●Return to
Linkage menu

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thetemperature reaches
above your set value.

● Temperature↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thetemperature reaches
below your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the temperatureon which the alarm
operates.

Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

● Angle↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when theangle reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when theangle reaches below
your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Initial value: ↑ 115℃↓ -10℃
Adjustment range -10℃ ~115℃( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)

Sets the angle onwhich the alarm
operates.

Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

110 →Initial value: ↑ +180.0° ↓ -180.0°
Adjustment range -180.0° ~ +180.0°( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry : Current sensor [Current]
The SBS-01C has the capability of measuring
current, voltage and capacity (consumption) fromdrive battery all at the same time.

*Current sensor must be installed in theaircraft.

Drive

ESC

BatteryMotor
to Receiver

SBS-01C● Select [Current] in the Telemetry screen andaccess the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu

Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for thecurrent alarm

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for thevoltage alarm
Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for the
consumption capacity alarm
The consumption capacity is indicated.
It isn't the present battery capacity.

◆ Alarm setting↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches above
your set value.

Sets the current on
which the alarm
operates.

↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches below
your set value.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.

"Vibrator" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3111 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry : Airspeed sensor [Airspeed]

Displaying data from the airspeed*A Airspeed sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

The speed screen displays and sets the speed
data from an SBS-01TAS (Airspeed sensor) soldseparately.
The speed of the aircraft during flight can bedisplayed. After flight, the maximum speed during
flight can be viewed. Airspeed is the speed of anaircraft relative to the air. You will be able to get amore accurate aircraft speed.

*The Airspeed sensor is necessary, and is sold separately.
Mount and connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in
FASSTest12CH mode.
*The FASSTest18CH /T-FHSS mode can use all the telemetryfunctions.

● Tap the [Speed sensor] button in the Telemetry
screen to call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu

SpeedMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches below
your set value.

Sets the speed on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Alarm setting when speed increases

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the vibrator
alarm. If using vibrator, choose one of the three
types.
3. Tap Limit [xxx km/h].
4. Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Adjustment range 0km/h~800km/h(↑Limit ≧ ↓Limit)

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*When the screen is tapped for one second, the rate is resetto the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the originalstate, push the HOME/EXIT button.

112 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Tele. setting

Speech interval set , data logging of telemetry.

Set the speech interval of telemetry data, and thelogging of telemetry data to a microSD card atchosen intervals.
Telemetry data can be checked on your PC after aflight.
● Tap the [Tele.setting] button in the Linkage menu
to call the setup screen shown below.

Sets the speech interval●Return to
Linkage menu

Initial value: 0 sec.
Adjustment range 0-30 sec.

Telemetry data log function
Telemetry data has been adapted to the log function which is recorded at the microSD card.
【Setting method】① Open the linkage menu Tele. setting screen.
② Log recording can be started and stopped by operating a switch. The Logging switch is selected.
③ The log output interval can be set.
* The data to be recorded is updated at the time set by Linkage menu → System Type screen D/L interval. For
example, when the log output interval is 1 second and the D/L interval is 2 seconds the same data is overlapped andrecorded twice.
【Operation method】① Insert the microSD card into the card slot.
② Set the switch set by Log Start/Stop Switch to ON. A beep sounds and a log file is created and recording of thetelemetry data begins.

Absolutely never remove the microSD card while log data is being recorded.

③ Set the switch set by Logging switch to OFF. A beeping sound is generated and recording of the telemetry data stops.
④ Turn off the transmitter power and remove the microSD card.
■ Log file
A log file is created in the microSD card LOG folder. Two files with the same filename, but a different extension are
created. (Example: 00001234.FLI, 00001234.FLD)■ Extension FLI: Slot allocation information file
■ Extension FLD: Log data file
*When copying or moving a log file, always select both the .FLI file and .FLD file.
Log files can be converted to CSV format by using the telemetry log converter available at the Futaba website.
■ Notes◇ Altimeter altitude data and GPS distance and altitude data output with the point that time logging started as thereference (0 m). When the transmitter preset position and the log start position are different, the transmitter display
and the log data display will also be different. The altitude and distance from the take-off position can be recorded bystarting logging immediately after take-off.
◇ The transmitter gear ratio or number of fins setting is not reflected in the speedometer log data (speed). Multiply thegear ratio or number of fins by the speed data.
◇ When the microSD card becomes full, recording stops and does not resume even if logging is restarted.

113 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Telemetry Alarm Duration and Repeat time
The repeat time and duration time for the telemetry alarm (buzzer, vibration and speech) can be set.

● Tap the [Telemetry Setting] button in the Linkagemenu to call the setup screen shown below.

Duration is not displayed when
Repeat is INH.

Duration
It is an alarm output time.
Setting range：1 s ～ 30 s
Initial value：INH
Duration value has to be less than
repeat value.
Duration time is extended when theother alarm event occurs.

Repeat
It is a repeat time of an alarm
output.
Setting range：INH，1 s ～ 240 s
Initial value：INH[Duration and Repeat time for Telemetry Alarm]e.g. Repeat time is 8 seconds and Duration time is 5 seconds.
Repeat time 8s
Alarm
output

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Duration time 5s

114 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Trainer

Trainer system starting and setting

T16IZ trainer system makes it possible for the
instructor to choose which channels and operation
modes can be used in the student's transmitter.
The function and rate of each channel can be set.
The training method can also be matched to thestudent's skill level. Two transmitters must beconnected by an optional Trainer Cord, and theInstructor's transmitter should be programmed fortrainer operation, as described below.
When the Instructor activates the trainer switch, thestudent has control of the aircraft (if MIX/ FUNC/NORM mode is turned on, the Instructor can makecorrections while the student has control). Whenthe switch is released the Instructor regains control.
This is very useful if the student gets the aircraft
into an undesirable situation.
● Setting data are stored to model data.
● Student rate can be adjusted at MIX/FUNC/NORM mode.
● Activated student channels can be selectedby switches.

Note: This trainer system can be used in the following
manner:1. With the T16IZ transmitter and a conventionaltransmitter, if the channel order is different, it isnecessary to match the channel order before using thisfunction.
You can select the channel of input data from student's
transmitter in the "FUNC" or "MIX" mode.
2. When the T16IZ is used as the instructor’s transmitter,
set the modulation mode of the student’s transmitter to
PPM.
If being used as the student, T16IZ can be connected tothe instructor's transmitter which requires the student's
mode to be PPM. T16IZ always sends PPM mode signal
from the trainer jack.
(In the case of student's transmitters other than 2.4 GHz)
3. Be sure that all channels work correctly in bothtransmitters before flying.

Corresponding types of transmitters and trainer mode settings:
Types of transmitters

Instructor's transmitter settings
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH modeStudent's transmitter settings
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH modeMod. mode

Trainer Cords

Instructor

Student

T16IZ,FX-32
T14SG,T16SZ,
T18SZ,T18MZ,
T32MZ

T16IZ,FX-32
T14SG,T16SZ,
T18SZ,T18MZ,
T32MZ

Arbitrary

T16IZ

T14MZ, FX-40, T12Z,
T12FG,
FX-30

Arbitrary

12CH

PCM-G3
2.4G

12CH

PPM

T16IZ

T8FG, FX-20

Arbitrary

12CH
8CH

FASST-MLT2
FASST-MULT--

Arbitrary

8CH

PPM

-

-

T12FG

Arbitrary

8CH

Arbitrary

-

-

T12FG

T10J, T8J, T6K, T6J,
T6L

Arbitrary

8CH

Arbitrary

-

-

T16IZ

Arbitrary

12CH

Arbitrary

12CH

-

T16IZ

Arbitrary

12CH

Arbitrary

12CH

-

T16IZ

Arbitrary-

Arbitrary

8CH

-

T16IZ
T16IZ
T16IZ
T14MZ, FX-40, T12Z,
T12FG,
FX-30
T8FG, FX-20
T10C, T10CG, T10J,
T9C, T7C
T7C, T8J, T6K
T6J

T10C, T9C,
T7C,T6EX, T4EX
T10CG,T7C

16CH

Arbitrary

115 →

16CH

T12FG and 9C
Trainer Cords

T12FG and 9C
Trainer Cords

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

● Tap the [Trainer] button in the Linkage menu to callthe setup screen shown below.
●Return to Linkage menu

When using at the student side

When using at the teacher side

1. Select the mode.

1. Select the mode.

*When changing the mode, tap to the item you want tochange and change the mode using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲""▲▲" buttons. The display blinks. Tap the screen to change
the mode.

"Teacher/Student": Select [Student].
"ACT/INH": Enable operation by changing to[ACT].
"16/12/8 CH": When the student uses the
T16IZ, T14SG, T18SZ, T16SZ, T18MZ, T32MZ select[16CH]. When the student uses the T14MZ,
T12Z, T12FG or FX-40, select [12CH]. Otherwise
select [8CH].

Note: In "student mode", only the teacherside can turn on and off the power to thestudent's transmitter. Keep the power switch
always at off position.

*When changing the mode, tap to the item you want tochange and change the mode using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲""▲▲" buttons. The display blinks. Tap the screen to change
the mode.

"Teacher/Student": Select [Teacher].
"ACT/INH": Enable operation by changing to[OFF] or [ON].
"16/12/8 CHANNEL": When the student uses
the T16IZ (including the T18MZ, T32MZ, T14SG)
select [16CH]. Otherwise select [12CH]
or[8CH].

2. Select the trainer switch.

*When setting or changing the switch, tap to the "SWITCH"
item, call the switch setup screen and set the desired switch
and ON/OFF direction.

(See "Switch selection method" at the end of thismanual for selection method details.)*The switch mode can also be selected when setting the
ON position on the switch setup screen. When [Normal] isselected, normal ON/OFF operation is performed. When
[Alternate] is selected, the trainer function is alternately
turned on and off each time the switch is operated. This
allows alternate ON/OFF switching even when a momentary
switch (SH) is used.

Note: The trainer function won’t be turnedon unless the Instructor's transmitter receives
signals from the student's transmitter. Be
sure to confirm this after connecting yourtrainer cable.

116 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

3. Select the operating mode for each channel.

Trainer student channel setting
function
In training mode, the instructor's transmitter canpick up the student's signal on both the "Function"and "Mix" channels. That makes it easy for thetwo transmitters to connect even if the student andinstructor have set up their transmitters differently.
*When the instructor's transmitter mode is set to "NORM",
the signal of the same channel of the student's transmitter is
output as is. (The same as before.)"NORM": The model is controlled by signals
from the student transmitter.
"MIX" mode: The model is controlled bysignals from the teacher and student
transmitters. (Reset the student's model data
to the default condition.)"FUNC" mode (function mode):
The model is controlled by signals fromthe student transmitter with the teacher
AFR setting. (Reset the student's model data
to the default condition.)"OFF": Only the teacher side operates.

*The setting above allows setting of the servo throw relative
to the amount of student side operation when [MIX] or[FUNC] was selected.

When changing the rate, use the "▼▼" "▼""▲" "▲▲" button to Tap the [Rate] item of
the channel.
Setting range: -100~+100
Initial value: +100

*When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initial value.

4. Set the switch of each channel.

*When setting the switch at each channel, tap to the "SW"item of the channel you want to change, call the switch
setup screen, and select the switch.

"--" : Always ON.
"SA"~"SH": The switch which enables student
side operation can be selected. (See "Switch
selection method" at the end of this manual
for selection method details.)

Trainer connector power supply
specification
Trainer connector to supply power to external
equipment connected to the trainer connector, whenturning on the power by pressing the power switch
in the trainer student mode.
Futaba is not responsible for damage
sustained by combination with parts otherthan Futaba Genuine equipment.
When connecting Futaba transmitters to
the trainer code, do not operate the powerswitch on the student side transmitter andoperate the power switch on the teacherside transmitter as before. The student sidetransmitter turns power automatically in
conjunction with the teacher side.

117 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Warning setting

Mixing warning normal reset

The warning display at power ON can be turned
ON/OFF for each function. Use by setting functions
which may be dangerous if operated at power ON
to ON. Initial setting is all ON (Buzzer).

● Tap the [Warning setting] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup screen
shown below.
●Return to
Linkage menu

The settings can be changed
individually. When set to[Inhibit], a warning is not
displayed at power ON.

"Vibrator" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3WARNING

It is extremely dangerous tounnecessarily inhibit essential
warnings.

■ Careless spinning of propellers or rotors poses a
danger of serious injury or death.

118 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

User menu setting

Original menu screen making*Any change made to data entered from the User menu orfrom the normal method of use are the same. Changes madein either way are saved into the transmitter memory.

T16IZ has a menu for each of the following:
System, Linkage, and Model. Also, you cancreate a personalized User menu that can include
all of the menus that you use most often.
● Tap the [User menu setting] button in the
Linkage menu to call the setup screen
shown below.
●Return to Linkage menu

Tap here to selectyour first choice.

Once pressed, 3 pages of choices will be displayed.

When "---" is chosen,
it can be deleted.

Make your selection, press your choice and thefirst of your "User menu" will be entered.

How to call a User menu
1. From the home screen, press the U.MENU/MON. button.

From the home
screenHOME
screenFunction can becalled by a tap

Press the U.MENU/MON.
119 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Data reset

Model memory setting data reset. (by item)

This function is designed to allow you to reset
selected portions or all of the settings saved in
the active model memory. You may individuallychoose to reset the following sets of data:
Trim (All condition):
Reset the digital trim setting.
*All the conditions, or the condition currently
being displayed (the entire group for group setting),
can be selected.
*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.
Trim (Current and Group condition):
Reset the digital trim setting.
*Current condition, group condition, can beselected.

*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.
Model menu setting:Resets all the functions in the Model menu except
condition select.
All model setting:Resets all Linkage and Model menu functions
except for system type, model select, model type,function name, and telemetry setting.
Function Name:
A function name is reset.
Telemetry:
Reset the telemetry setting.

● Select [Data reset] at the linkage menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
●Return to Linkage menu

Data resetting method
1. Tap to the item you want to reset and tap
the screen.
*A confirmation message appears.

2. Execute reset by tapping the "Yes".

[Trim (All condition)]: Resets only the Trim (allconditions)[Trim(Current and Group condition)]: Resets
only the data of Trim (condition in use and all
the conditions set to group mode)[Model menu setting]: Resets all the functionsin the model menu, except the condition
selection functions.
[All model setting]: Resets all the functions in
the linkage menu and model menu except
the frequency, model select, and modeltype functions.
[Function name]: Resets only the function
name functions.
[Telemetry]: Resets only the teremetryfunctions.

CAUTIONCAUTION

Never engage the Data reset function
while the engine is starting or the
motor drive wiring is connected.

Throttle Reverse■ Sudden, abrupt spinning of propellers or rotors isextremely dangerous.

■ Only the throttle channel (CH3) initial setting is
REV (reverse). Thoroughly check the Hi and Low
directions of the engine or motor used and be carefulthat they do not suddenly run at full speed. Even
after data reset, CH3 is reversed.

120 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

MODEL MENU (Airplane/Glider functions)
The dedicated mixes, etc. usable when airplaneor glider model type is selected are displayedin this Model menu functions section. First use
the Model type function of the Linkage menu topreset the model type, wing type, and tail typematched to the fuselage used. Other settings reset
the data used in mixing function, etc.
These dedicated mixes can be set for eachflight condition, as required. When you want to
use the system by switching the settings for eachcondition by switch or stick position, use theCondition select function to add flight conditions.
(Up to 8 conditions can be used)

Note: The T16IZ is designed so that the airplane andglider model types can handle aircraft of the samewing type.
The functions common to airplanes and gliders,
except some dedicated functions, are summarized
without regard to the model type.
The setting items are different, depending on thenumber of servos, etc. according to the wing typeused. The setup screens in the instruction manual
are typical examples.

Model menu (Airplane/Glider) functions table
Servo monitor

Displays the servo test and operation position

Condition selectFlight conditions addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming, and condition
delay can be set.

AFR
Dual rate
Program. mixes

Sets the angle and curve of all the operation functions.
D/R curve which can be switched with a switch, etc. can also be added.
Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10 mixes can be used foreach condition.
This function adjusts the left and right ailerons. Roll axis correction and fine

Aileron differential tuning with a VR are also possible. This is convenient when making settings[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

Flap setting

The flaps can be adjusted independently. For a 4 flaps model, the camber flaps
can be mixed with the brake flaps.

[Airplane/glider, 2 flaps or more]

AIL → Camber flap

This mix operates the camber flaps in the aileron mode. It improves the[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons + 2 flaps or more]
operation characteristic of the roll axis.

AIL → Brake flap

This mix operates the brake flaps in the aileron mode. It improves the operation
characteristic of the roll axis.

[Airplane/glider, 4 flaps or more]

Aileron → RudderThis mix is used when you want to operate the rudder at aileron operation.
Banking at a shallow bank angle is possible.

[Airplane/glider, general]

during flight.

Elevator → Camber Lifting force can be increased at elevators up.

This mix is used when you want to the mix camber flaps with elevator operation.

Camber mixing
Airbrake → ELE

Camber flap → ELE
Rudder → Aileron
Rudder → Elevator
Butterfly (Crow)

This mix adjusts the camber and corrects the elevators.

[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

This mix is used to correct operation of the airbrakes (spoilers) when landing.
This mix is used to correct for attitude changes when the camber flaps are being
used.
This function is used to correct roll knife edge, etc. of stunt planes.
This function is used to correct roll maneuvers, knife edge, etc. of stunt planes.
This function is used when powerful brake operation is necessary.

Trim mix 1/2

The ailerons, elevators, and flaps trim offset rate can be called by switch orcondition selection.

Snap rollThis function selects the snap roll switch and adjusts the steering angle of eachrudder. Servo speed can also be adjusted.

Air brake

This function is used when airbrakes are necessary when landing or when diving,
etc. during flight.

Gyro[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more][Airplane/glider, general][Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons + 1 flap or more][Airplane/glider, general][Airplane, general][Glider, 2 ailerons or more][Glider general][Airplane general][Airplane, general]

This is a dedicated mix when a GYA Series gyro is used.

[Airplane/glider/multicopter, general]

Ailevator

This function adjusts the elevators and ailerons of models with elevator
specifications.

[Airplane/glider, elevator specifications]

Acceleration

Allows a brief "overload" in response to sudden Elevator, Elevator → Camber,and Ail → Rudder.

[Airplane/glider general]Motor

The operation speed when the motor of F5B and other EP gliders is started byswitch can be set.

[Airplane/glider, general]

V-TailWingletThis function adjusts the elevators and rudder of V-tail models.

[Airplane/glider, V-tail specifications]This function adjusts the left and right rudders of winglet models.

[Airplane/glider, winglet specifications]

121 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Condition selectFlight condition's addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming,and condition delay can be set. [All model types]

The functions in the Model menu can be used byswitching the settings of up to 8 flight conditions
by using the Condition select function to add flight
conditions. Add conditions, as required.
When you do not want to use the Condition selectfunction, this setting is unnecessary. In this case,use the flight conditions assigned at initial setting.
● Since switching by stick and lever position, in
addition to ordinary toggle switch, is possible
as the flight condition selector switch, thisfunction can be linked with other operations.
● A Condition Delay function can be set.
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated
when there are sudden changes in the servo

positions and when there are variations in
the operating time between channels duringcondition switching can be suppressed. The
delay can be set for each channel.
When setting the delay function at theswitching destination condition, therelated function changes after a delay
corresponding to the set amount.
● When multiple conditions were set, theiroperation priority can be freely changed.
● The condition name can be changed. The
selected condition name is displayed on
the screen. When a condition has been
added, give it a name which can be easily
confirmed.

● Select [Condition select] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name

Conditions List

Condition Renaming

Condition Addition

1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to rename in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Rename] button.
3. Enter the new name from the
keyboard which appears on
the screen.
4. When the keyboard [Condition
name] key is tapped, the newname is registered.

1. When the [Add] button is tapped, theCondition Select screen appears.
*Only the number of buttons corresponding to theconditions which can be added are displayed.
2. Select the desired conditions by tapping
the buttons.
*The selected conditions are added to Conditions
List.
3. Tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen.
4. Select the switch to be used in condition
switching.
(See "Switch selection method" at the endof this manual for selection method
details.)
5. The "Condition1" data for the added
conditions is copied.

122 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Currently selected condition name

The ON/OFF switch ofcondition is chosen.

Conditions List

Condition Copy

Condition Remove

1. Tap the [Copy] button. The Copy screen
appears.
2. Select the condition by tapping the buttonof the copy source conditions.
3. Next, select the condition by tapping the
copy destination condition.
4. Tap the [Copy] button.
5. When the [Yes] button is tapped, the datais copied. (To abort copying, tap the [No]button.)1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to reset in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Remove] button.
3. When the [Yes] button istapped, the condition isreset. (To abort resetting, tap
the [No] button.)● Group/single mode switching (Gr./Sngl)(For a description of the operation
method, see the description at theback of this manual.)

Last condition has
the highest priority

Priority change
1. Tap the condition whose
priority you want to change
in Conditions List.
2. Change the priority with thepriority [ ] or [ ] button. (Thelast condition has the highest
priority.)*The initial setting condition
cannot be moved. It has thelowest priority.

Condition delay setting
1. Switch to the condition you want to set.
2. Tap the Delay button of the channel you
want to set.
3. Use the value input buttons to set the delay.
●Initial value: 0●Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)

123 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

AFR

The angle and curve of each operation function can be set. [All model types]

AFR function is used to adjust the throw andoperation curve of the stick, lever, and switch
functions for each flight condition.

Rate

100%

Rate

40%

When D/R is turned ON, the display willshow "D/R----", and the rudder angle (rate)and EXP can be set when D/R is ON.

This is normally used after End Point has defined
the maximum throw. When mixing is applied fromone channel to another channel, both channels
can be adjusted at the same time by adjusting theoperation rate through the AFR function.
● Operation curve adjustment: Three typesof curves (EXP1, EXP2, and Point) can beselected. A maximum 17 points curve can beused for the point curve type. (Initial setting:
9 points) The number of points can also be
increased and decreased and curves fromcomplex curves to simple curves can beused.
● Operation speed adjustment: The operation
speed of each function when the function
is operated (including at flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The function
operates smoothly at a constant speed
corresponding to the set speed.

● Select [AFR] at the model menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
Curve select
EXP1, EXP2, Point curve●Return to Model menu

Curve selectSeparately ⇔ Combination(Left and rightsymmetricalcurve.)
Left/right, Up/down, overall
adjustment at Rate A andRate B● Operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Function selection
1. When the function select button is tapped, a selection screen appears.
2. Select the function you want to set at the selection screen.

● Group/single mode switch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)● Servo speed setting(For a description of the setting
method, see the description at
the back of this manual.)

124 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Dual rate

100%

D/R curves which can be switched by switch, etc.
can be added. The curve can be adjusted by the
AFR function.
● Up to 6 rates can be added for eachcondition.
● D/R is set for each condition and is notreflected at other conditions.
● D/R at the top of the D/R list has priority.

40%● Select [Dual rate] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu

The ON/OFF switch ofdual rate is chosen.

Activate the D/R function
by tapping the [INH] .

Rate, EXP settings
are on AFR function

When the function select button
is tapped, a selection screen
appears.
Select the function you want to
set at the selection screen.

● Setting rudder angle, EXP
On this D/R screen you can set functions andswitchover switches. Rudder angle (rate) and EXP
settings are performed on the AFR screen when
the D/R switch is ON.

125 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10
mixings can be used for each condition. [All model types]

Programmable mixing may be used to correctundesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also
be used for unusual control configurations. Mixing
means that the motion of a command channel,
called the "master," is added to the motion of themixed channel, called "slave."
You may choose to have the Masters trim added to
the Slave channel response, if you desire ("Trim"setting). The mixing curve can be changed sothat the undesired tendencies can be corrected
effectively by setting the EXP1/EXP2/Point modes.

Offset-type mixing applies a fixed offset or presetto the programmed channel servo operation andmay control up to four circuits simultaneously.
The Programmable mixing includes a powerful linkfunction, which allows Programmable mixing to belinked with the special mixing functions, or withother programmable mixing functions. The linkfunction can be set up for Master and Slave channel
individually.

● Tap the [Prog. mixes] button in the Model menu to callthe setup screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu
● Group/single modeswitch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information,
see the description
at the back of thismanual.)After this function is
activated, the masterand slave function
names (or offset mixing)
are displayed.

Mixing/Offset modeswitch● Operation curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the back ofthis manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH] .

Trim mode setting ON/OFF.

The ON/OFF switch ofprog. mixes is chosen.

Fine tuning trim
setting

Master function(or Stick, Switch, Dial)
is chosen.

The on time (start/stoptime) can be set up to 4
seconds. It is useful for
landing gear control of thejet or scale plane, etc.

Slave function is chosen.
Servo speed setting

126 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Setting methods●Group/single mode selection
Activating functions for only the selectedconditions:
1. Tap the [Gr] button and switch to the [Sngl ]mode.

*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the Gr
and Sngl modes.

●Mixing mode selection
Using the offset mode:
1. Tap the Mode button and switch to theOffset mode.

1. To turn the trim mode ON/OFF, tap the Trim
button on the screen.

*When mixing includes master side trim, set the Trim button
to [ON]. When mixing does not include master side trim, set
the Trim button to [OFF].
*Each time this button is pressed, it toggles between [ON]and [OFF].
*This is effective when the master channel is set by Function.

●Mixing curve type selection
1. Tap the curve type selection button of thecurve type you want to use to display theselection screen. Then, select the curve youwant to use.

*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the
Mixing and Offset modes.

*For a description of the curve setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

●Mixing setup screen selection
1. Tap the button of the mixing you want to
set. The mixing setup screen is displayed.
Activate the function.
2. Activate the function by tapping the [INH]button.

●Fine tuning trim setting
1. When using the curve fine tuning function,
tap the [--] button of the Fine Tuning item tocall the <Switch> screen and then select thelever, VR, etc. you want to use.

*Each time this button is tapped, it toggles between [INH]and [ON/OFF].

●Mixing ON/OFF switch setting and ON/OFF
direction switching*An ON/OFF switch is not set even when the function is
activated.

1. When you want to turn mixing ON/OFF byswitch, tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen and then select the switch and its ON
direction.
*For a description of the selection method, see [Switch
setting method] at the back of this manual.

*For a description of the fine tuning trim setting method, see
the description at the back of this manual.

●Servo speed setting
1. When setting the servo speed, tap the speed
button. The Servo speed setup screen isdisplayed.
*For a description of the servo speed setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.
*Offset mixing changes the speed. Use the Speed In andSpeed Out buttons to readjust the speed.
The mixing switch can set a delay with a different rate atstarting and stopping.
*This function is inactive when a mixing switch is not set.

●Master channel setting (except offset typemixing)1. Tap the Master button to call the Function
menu and select the master channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).
*Master channel control can be set to stick, VR, and othersimple travels which do not include End point, AFR, D/R,
mixing setting, etc. In this case, display the <Function,H/
W> screen by tapping the [Stick, Switch, Dial] button andthen select master channel side control.

●Slave channel setting
1. Tap the Slave button to call the Function
menu and select the slave channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
*Each time the button is pressed, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).

●Trim mode ON/OFF setting

127 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Aileron differential[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

The left and right aileron differential can be
adjusted independently. The differential rate canalso be adjusted according to the flying state bysetting a fine tuning VR.

● Select [Aileron differential] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
●Return to Model menu

AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition name

Aileron differential

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)(For more information, see
the description at the backof this manual.)

Aileron left/rightadjustment

Fine tuning VR setting*The graph is operated by setting a VR, etc.

*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
Aileron differential● Fine tuning VR operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Setting method● Tap to the aileron (AIL) 1~4(2) left (or right)
setting item.
Adjust the aileron angles.
● When setting the fine tuning VR, tap the "--"
item and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the fine tuning VR.
● The fine tuning rate can be set by curve.

128 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Flap setting[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 2 flaps or more]

The up/down travel of each flap (camber flaps:
FLP1/2, brake flaps: FLP3/4) can be adjusted
independently at each servo according to the wing type.

FLP 4(Brake Flap)

FLP 3(Brake Flap)
FLP 1(Camber Flap)● The operation reference point of each flap can beoffset

The camber flaps of a 4-flap model can be mixed
with the brake flaps. (Brake FLP to camber FLP)

FLP 2
(Camber Flap)● An ON/OFF switch can be set.

● Select [Flap setting] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.

Currently selected condition name●Return to Model menu
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)(For more information, see
the description at the backof this manual.)

Up side/Down side
adjustment
Operation reference
point offset
Camber flap setting

Brake flap setting

Operation is performed via the volume
switches, etc., set for each flap control of thefunction.

The operational volume
switch is set up by "Function"

Mixing
INH ⇔ ON
Up side/Down side
adjustment

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation reference
point offset

Brake flap to Camber flap setting

Setting method● Tap flap (FLP) 1~4 up or down according to
the wing type.
Adjust the travel independently.
● To offset the operation reference point ofeach flap, tap the corresponding offset item.
Use the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲" button to offset
the reference point.
● When using brake FLP to camber FLP mixing,*The display screen is an
example. The actual screen
depends on the ModelType.

tap the [INH] item and tap the screen. (ON isdisplayed.)
When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

129 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTSAIL → Camber flap

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 2 ailerons + 2 flaps or more

This mix operates the camber flaps (FLP1/2)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stickis manipulated, the ailerons and camber flaps
perform aileron operation simultaneously andthe operation characteristic of the roll axis is
improved.

FLP 1(Camber Flap)
AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)● The aileron left/right mixing rate of each flap servo
can be fine-tuned.
● A mixing curve can be set.
● An ON/OFF switch can be set.
● Linking is possible: Link this mix to other mixes.

● Select [AIL→Camber flap] at themodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

FLP 2(Camber Flap)
AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition name

AIL

●Return to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

AIL

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Adjustment of each
flap servo

To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

Setting method● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)● When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the the back of this manual.)● Tap the left or right item of each flap servo.
Adjust the mixing rate.

*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).

● A mixing curve can be set. (1/2 page)(For a description of the mixing curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)● To set linking, tap the [Link] item.
Set it to ON and tap the screen.

130 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTSAIL → Brake flap

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 4 flaps or more

This mix operates the brake flaps (FLP3/4)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stickis manipulated, the aileron and brake flaps
perform the aileron operation simultaneously
and the operation characteristic of the roll axis is
improved.

FLP 3(Brake Flap)
AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)● The aileron left and right mixing rates can be
adjusted for each flap servo.
● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)● Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.

● Select [AIL→ Brake flap] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
●Return to Model menu

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition nameAIL

● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

FLP 4(Brake Flap)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

AIL

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Adjustment of each
flap servo

To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

● Setting method● Tap the INH item.
(ON is displayed.)● When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the at the back of this manual.)● Tap the left or right button of each flap servo.
Adjust the mixing rate.

adjustments can be made by reversing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).

● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)● To set linking, tap the Link item.
Set it to ON and tap the screen.

*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,

131 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Aileron → Rudder[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

Use this mix when you want to mix the rudders
with aileron operation.
● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)● The mixing rate can be fine-tuned by setting a VR.

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

(

AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing

(

)

)

V-TAILRUDDER 2● Select [Aileron→ Rudder] at themodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.
AileronRudder●Return to Model menu

Currently selected condition name→

● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

RUDDERRUDDER

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Aileron → Rudder

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Fine tuning VR setting

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation mode
Adjustment rate

Setting method● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)● When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the back of this manual.
● When setting a VR, tap to the Fine Tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set. The VR operation
mode can also be selected.
● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting

method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)[Fine tuning VR operation mode][LIN.] M i x i n g r a t e 0 % a t c e n t e r o f V R .
When the VR is turned clockwise andcounterclockwise, the mixing rateincreases and decreases, respectively.
[ATL+] Mixing rate 0% at left end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[ATL-] Mixing rate 0% at right end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[SYM.] When the VR is turned to the left or
right of the neutral position, the mixing
rate increases.

132 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Elevator → Camber [Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
Note: Tailless wing elevator can be operated
when this mix is activated.

This function is used when you want to mix thecamber flaps with elevator operation. When used,
the flaps are lowered by up elevator, and lift canbe increased.

● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)● The mixing rate can be fine-tuned by setting a VR.

● Select [Elevator→Camber] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Elevator → Camber●Return to Model menu

Currently selected condition name

● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Overall adjustment by
Rate A and Rate B.

Elevator → Camber

The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

Ailerons and flaps rateadjustment

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

Elevator → Camber

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Fine tuning VR setting

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation mode
Adjustment rate

Setting method● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)● When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)● When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.
The VR operation mode can also be
selected.
● A mixing curve can also be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

133 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Camber mixing[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more

This function adjusts the rate of camber
operation which operates the wing camber(ailerons, camber flaps, brake flaps) in thenegative and positive directions. The aileron,flap, and elevator rates can also be adjusted
independently by curve, and attitude changes
caused by camber operation can be corrected.
*Initial setting assigns camber operation to side lever LS.

● The up/down side rates of the aileron, flap, andelevator servos can be adjusted by curve. Whenthe mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing themixing rate polarity (+ or -).
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)● A delay can be set for each condition. A cut
switch which can turn OFF the delay function canbe set.
● The speed of the aileron, flap, and elevator servos
can be set. (In side/Out side)● Select [Camber mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

Currently selected condition nameServo speed setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Condition delay cut
switchCondition delay setting●Return to Model menu

Ailerons, flaps
and elevators rateadjustment● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Overall adjustment by
Rate A and Rate B.

134 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Setting method● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)● When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)● When setting a condition delay, tap to the[Condition delay] item.
Set the delay.

(Curve/rate setup screen)● The curve and rate are adjusted by callingthe aileron, flap, and elevator curve/ratescreens.
The rate and curve of each servo can be set
by calling each screen. (For a description of
the curve setting method, see the description
at the back of this manual.)
The servo speed can also be adjusted.

When setting a cut switch, tap [Cut-switch]and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the switch and set its
ON direction. (Always ON at [--] setting)(For a description of the condition delay
function, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
V-TAILELEVATORELEVATOR 2AILVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2

LS

135 →

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Airbrake → ELE[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

This mix is used when you want to mix theelevators with airbrake (spoiler) operation. It
raises the elevators to correct for dropping of thenose during airbrake operation.
*This function does not operate when airbrake is not assigned
at the Function menu in the Linkage menu.
● The Rate 1 side/Rate 2 side mixing rate with theelevator servos can be adjusted.
● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)● The mixing rate can be fine-tuned by setting a VR.

● Select [Airbrake→ ELE] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

AIR BRAKEAILVATOR

V-TAILELEVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2

ELEVATOR 2*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
Currently selected condition name●Return to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Adjustment ofelevator servo

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
setting

Setting method● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)● When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.
● When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set. The VR operation
mode can also be set.
(For a description of the fine tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

136 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Camber flap → ELE[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, 2 ailerons + 1 flap or more

This mixing is used to correct changes (elevator
direction) generated when the camber flaps (speed
flaps) are used.

FLP 1(Camber Flap)● The elevator servos up side/down side rate can be
adjusted. When the mixing direction is reversedby the linkage, adjustments can be made bychanging the mixing rate polarity (+ or –).
● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)● The mixing rate can be fine-tuned by setting a VR.

● Select [Camber flap→ELE] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
●Return to Model menu

ELEVATOR 2

ELEVATORELEVATOR 2Currently selected condition nameCamber flap → ELE● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

AILVATOR

V-TAILELEVATOR

FLP 2(Camber Flap)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Camber flap → ELE

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Adjustment ofelevator servo

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
setting

Setting method● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)● When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)● Tap elevator servos. Adjust the mixing rate.

*When the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or –).

● When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning "--"
item and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the VR. The VR
operation mode can be selected.
● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

137 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Rudder → Aileron[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

This function is used when you want to mix theailerons with rudder operation. It is used whenrudder is applied during roll maneuvers, knifeedge, etc. of acrobatic planes. It can be used tobank scale models, large models, etc. like a fullsize plane.

(● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)● Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.
● The mixing rate can be fine-tuned by setting a VR.

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing

)

(

)

V-TAILRUDDER 2● Select [Rudder→Aileron] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown below.

RUDDERRUDDER

Currently selected condition name●Return to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

Fine tuning
setting

Setting method● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)● When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see back of this manual.)● When setting a VR, tap to the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.

The VR operation mode can also be set.
(For a description of the fine tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the back of this manual.)● When linking: tap the [Link] item. (ON isdisplayed.)

138 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Rudder → Elevator[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general

This function is used when you want to mix
elevator operation with rudder operation. It is used
to correct undesirable tendencies when rudder
is applied in roll maneuvers, knife edge, etc. ofacrobatic planes.

● Link can be set: Links this mixing to other mixings.
● The mixing rate can be fine-tuned by setting a VR.
(Fine tuning)● A mixing curve can be set.
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)● Select [Rudder→Elevator] at themodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

Currently selected condition name●Return to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

Fine tuning
setting

Setting method● Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)● When setting a switch, tap to the [--] itemof the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)● When setting a VR, tap the Fine tuning"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and then select the VR. The

adjustment rate can be set.
The VR operation mode can also be set.
(For a description of the fine tuning VR setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)● A mixing curve can be set.
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)● When linking: tap the [Link] item. (ON isdisplayed.)

139 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Butterfly[Corresponding model type]: Glider, 2 ailerons or more

This function allows powerful brake operation
by simultaneously raising the left and rightailerons and lowering the flaps (camber flap,
brake flap).
This setting will allow the ailerons to be raised
while the flaps are simultaneously lowered.
Butterfly (crow) produces an extremely efficientlanding configuration by accomplishing thefollowing:
1. S low the aircraft’s velocity.
2. Provide washout at the wing tips to reduce
the tendency to tip stall.
3. C reate more lift toward the center of thewing allowing it to fly at a slower speed.

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF bysetting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)● The butterfly operation reference point can beoffset. When the screen is tapped with the offset
item selected when operated to the position to
be changed, the reference point is offset. If thereference point is offset too much, unexpected
operation may be performed.
● The ailerons and flaps operation speed can be
adjusted. (In side/Out side)● A delay can be set for each condition. A cut
switch which can turn OFF the delay function canalso be set.
● The differential rate can be adjusted.
*When servo binding occurs when setting the ailerons andflaps in butterfly mixing, use the AFR function to adjust therate.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.

● Select [Butterfly] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.

To next page

In speed

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Out speed

Condition delay setting

Condition delay cut
switchThe differential rate
can be adjusted.

（First）0 ～ 27（Slowly）*When differential rate is "+", Up rate is decrease and DOWN
rate is increase.
*When differential rate is "-", the calculation method of UP/
DOWN and a direction become reverse.
When offsetting the butterfly operationreference point, operate to the throttle
stick point you want to change and thentouch the Offset button. The reference
point displays 0%. When [Yes] is touched,
the reference point is changed. Then,"Initialize elevator curve?" appears,
allowing you to confirm your setting.

*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.

140 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

●Return to Model menu
Select the Mixing RateAIL and FLP box. Adjust
the mixing rates.
Elevator rateadjustment(To elevator curve setup screen)

Fine tuning
setting(Elevator correction rate setup screen)*In case of tailless
wing not display.

The offset position isindicated by a red dottedline by an elevator curve.
Overall adjustment
by Rate A and Rate B

Mixing curve setting*For a description of the curve setting method,
see the description at the back of this manual.

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
V-TAILELEVATORELEVATOR 2AILVATORELEVATOR141 →ELEVATOR 2

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Throttle stick full stroke MODE
● Mode A(Normal)● The butterfly operation direction is reversed
at the neutral position (50) of the throttle
stick.

● Mode B(Throttle stick full stroke MODE)● It does not reverse at the neutral position,
so you can set the butterfly operation startpoint with the full stroke of the throttle stick.

At offset 20

At offset 20

At offset 70

At offset 70

The direction of butterfly motion is reversed.

The direction of butterfly motion is not reversed.

142 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Trim mix 1/2[Corresponding model type]: Glider, general

These functions call the ailerons, elevators, andflaps (camber flaps, brake flaps) trim offset rates
preset according to the flight state.
The amount of ailerons, elevator, and flaps(camber flap, brake flap) trim offset can be set to aswitch.
As an example Trim mix 1 can be set up forlaunching, with speed flaps and ailerons dropped,
and a slight amount of up elevator. Trim mix
2 can be used for high speed flying, with both
ailerons and speed flaps reflexed slightly, and a bitof down elevator.
The trim functions can be activated during
flight by setting a switch. To prevent sudden trimchanges when switching flight conditions, a delay
can be set to provide a smooth transition between
the two. Trim mix 2 will have priority over Trimmix 1.

Example1. Move to the [INH] item. Set the trim mix function to[ON].
*When separating the settings for each condition, move tothe [Group] item and set it to [Single].
2. Select the ON/OFF switch.
3. Select the [Manual] or [Auto] mode.
In the [Auto] mode, also select an auto SW. This
switch can be linked to a stick, etc.
<Speed>
In: The operation speed at switch ON can be set.
Out: The return speed at switch OFF can be set.
<Fine Tuning>
The offset rate can be varied in the Fine Tuning
numeric range set at screen by VR, etc. selection.
<Condition Delay>
When flight conditions are set, the operation speed
can be set for each condition. Condition delay
operation can be interrupted and each rudder
quickly returned to its original position by selecting a
cut switch.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)● Select [Trim mix1 or 2] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.

To next page

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

In speed

Manual/Auto mode
selection
Manual: Switches thefunction ON/OFF byswitchAuto: Trim mix function
call can be linked to a
stick, etc. A stick switch,etc. separate from thefunction ON/OFF switch
is set.

Out speed
Condition delay cut
switchCondition delay setting

When a fine tuning VR
is set, the trim ratesof ailerons, flaps andelevators can be adjusted.

（First）0 ～ 27（Slowly）●Return to Model menu
The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

The offset rate of ailerons, flaps and elevators can be adjusted.
Tap to the corresponding setting item. Adjust the rate.

143 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Snap roll

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general(Example) Setting example for F3A

This function selects the switch and rate adjustmentof each rudder, (ailerons, elevators, or flaps) whena snap roll is performed.
● Four snap roll directions can be set. (Right/up,
right/down, left/up, left/down)● Operation mode: When [Master] mode is selected,
the Snap Roll function is turned ON/OFF by masterswitch in the state in which the direction switch
was switched to the direction in which you wantto snap roll. When [Single] mode is selected, snap
roll in each direction can be executed by meansof independent switches.
● A safety switch can be set. As a safety measure,the switch can be set so that snap roll is not
executed when, for instance, the landing
gear is lowered, even if the switch is turned on
accidentally. The snap roll switch is activated only
when the safety switch is ON.
● The operation speed of the aileron, elevator, andflap servos can be adjusted for each snap rolldirection. (In side/out side)● Mode: [Master]● Safety SW: [SW-G] (Safety measure)● Master SW: [SW-H] (Main switch for
executing snap roll)● Direction switches:*The snap roll up side left and right and down side left andright direction switches are selected here.
Right/Up: [SW-D] OFF-OFF-ON
Right/Down: [SW-D] ON-OFF-OFF
Left/Up: [SW-A] OFF-OFF-ON
Left/Down: [SW-A] ON-OFF-OFF● Speed adjustment
The operation speed of each control
surface when the snap switch is ON canbe changed and snap roll executed bystick while there is switch operation can be
performed.

● Select [Snap roll] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown
The ON/OFF switch
below.

of snap roll is chosen.

The safety switch is
chosen.
To next page

●Return to Model menu
Master or Single ischosenCondition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Snap rolldirections

Master mode : Direction
switches
Single mode : Snap rollswitches

Aileron, elevator and
Rudder rate adjustment

In speed

Out speed（First）0 ～ 27（Slowly）

144 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Air brake[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general

This function is used when an air brake isnecessary when landing or diving, etc.
The preset elevators and flaps (camber flap,
brake flap) offset amount can be activated by aswitch.
The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, andflap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the
speed of the aileron, elevator, and flap servos canbe adjusted. (In side/Out side) A delay can be set
for each condition, and a Cut switch which willturn OFF the delay can be chosen. Trim amounts
can be fine-tuned by setting a VR. You can also
set the Auto Mode, which will link Airbrake to a
stick, switch, or dial. A separate stick switch ordial can also be set as the ON/OFF switch.

Elevator
Aileron 2
Aileron 1● Select [Air brake] at the model menu and call the
setup screen shown below.

*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
To next page

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

In speed

The ON/OFF switch of
air brake is chosen.
Manual/Auto mode
selection
Manual: Switches thefunction ON/OFF byswitchAuto: Air brake function
call can be linked to a
stick, etc. A stick switch,etc. separate from thefunction ON/OFF switch
is set.

Out speed
Condition delay
setting and cut switch
setting.

Fine tuning setting（First）0 ～ 27（Slowly）

Offset：The offset
rate of ailerons, flaps,and elevators can be
a d j u s t e d . Ta p t o t h ecorresponding setting
item. Adjust the rate.

●Return to Model menu

Fine tuning：When a finetuning VR is set on thenext page, the ailerons',
flaps', and elevators' trim
rates can be adjusted.
Tap to the corresponding
setting item. Adjust therate.

The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

145 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Gyro[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider/multicopter, general

This function is used when a GYA Series gyrois used to stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The
sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/GYmode) can be switched with a switch.
● Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can beswitched.
● Up to 3 axes (Gyro/Gyro 2/Gyro 3) can be
simultaneously controlled.

*Initial setting does not assign a sensitivity channel. Use theFunction menu of the Linkage menu to assign the sensitivity
channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) used to a vacant channel
beforehand.
Set [Control] and [Trim] other than Function to [--].

● Select [Gyro] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
Tapping this will change INH to either ON or OFF
and enable operation. Adjustment of the threerates (sensitivity) and switching between Normaland AVCS is possible.

●Return to Model menu

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
gyro is chosen.

The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) andsensitivity of the 3axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.

3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment● Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can be used.
Tap to the [Rate] item. Adjust the rate.
● When using this function, Tap [INH].
● When a Futaba GYA gyro is used, when [GY] type is selected, thesensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS and Normal modes.
● When setting a switch, tap the Switch item and tap the "--" button to callthe selection screen, and then select the switch and set its ON direction.
(For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at
the end of this manual.)

146 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

(Example) Setting three axis using a GYA450 and GYA451 (2)● Wing type: Aileron 2 servos mounted fuselage selected● Set 5CH → Gyro (GYA451AIL), 7CH → Gyro2 (GYA451ELE), 8CH → Gyro3 (GYA450RUD), Control and Trim → "--" : at
the Function menu of the Linkage menu.
● Gyro setting of the Model menu.

Rate
1
2
3

ACT
OFF/ON
INH
ON/OFF

Type
GY

SwitchSE

Gyro
AVCS : 60%

Gyro ２
AVCS : 60%

Gyro ３
AVCS : 60%

GY

SENormal : 60%

Normal : 60%

Normal : 60%*Set so that Rate 1 is turned on at the back position of switch E
and Rate 3 is turned ON at the front position. Since switch E isturned OFF at the center, Rate 2 remains [INH].
S.BUS Receiver
GYA451

Aileron servo

GYA451

AVCS

Elevator servo

S.BUS2 port

GAIN 0％NORMALGYA450

When AVCS is used werecommend that thesensitivity CH be set tothe 3-position.

Rudder servo

147 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Ailevator[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Tail type
(Effective only when 2 servos used at the elevators)
Ailevator

This function improves the operating performanceof the roll axis by operating the elevators asailerons.
Ailevator is where each elevator in a standard(conventional) or v-tail moves independently, likeailerons on a wing. In addition to each elevator side
moving up and down together, each side moves in
opposite directions when moving as an ailevator.
On a V-tail, this is also known as a ruddervator,
as they can serve the same purpose. Typically,both ailevator and ailerons are coupled together tomaximize roll performance, especially on larger
wingspan planes.

ELEVATOR(AILERON 5)

ELEVATOR 2(AILERON 6)

Note: Select ailevator as the Model type at theModel type screen. This changes the output
channel. Check the Function menu.

● Select [Ailevator] at the model
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
●Return to Model menu
Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Elevator function)
The up and down rates of the left andright elevators when the elevator stick ismanipulated can be individually adjusted.

(Aileron function)
When the elevators are used asailerons, aileron travel of the left andright elevators can be adjusted.

● Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run outof travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

148 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Acceleration[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider general

Acceleration setting can be performed at Elevator,
Elevator → Camber and Aileron → Rudder. (Glider
only)● This setting is divided into elevator setting and camber
setting. The setting method is the same.
● Camber setting sets the acceleration function for Ele
to camber mixing. Setting is not performed when Ele tocamber mixing is INH.
● The acceleration function can be set for both the upside and down side.
● Function ON/OFF switch setting is performed for
Aileron→ Rudder setting only.
● Aileron→ Rudder setting is acceleration
function setting for Aileron→ Rudder mixing. It is not
performed when Aileron→ Rudder mixing is INH.

● Select [Acceleration] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

To next page
2/3 : Elevator → Camber
3/3 : Aileron → Rudder
Operation up to thisrange will initiate
acceleration.

●Return to Model menu

Act position

The rate the angle
increases.

Current position

The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.

（First return）1 ～ 100（Slow return）（Acceleration doesn't function as 0.）

Setting method● Acceleration rate setting (Rate)● The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
● The operation point at accelerationand deceleration can be set. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration is
performed.

Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the servo stroke is large, make yoursettings so there is no binding of your linkage.

149 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Motor[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general

This function lets you set the operation speed whenthe motor of an F5B or other EP glider is started byswitch. The operation speed can be set in 2 rangesof slow speed flight and high speed flight (Speed 1/
Speed 2). This function can also be operated as asafety function by setting 2 switches.
● The in side and out side operating speeds can be
adjusted independently in 2 ranges (Speed 1/
Speed 2).
● The boundary between the 2 ranges can be set.
(From speed 1 to speed 2)● Select [Motor] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.

● The set operation speed operation can be
activated at initial operation only. (1 time
operation) However, operation can be repeatedby setting the switch to OFF before operation isfinished. When you want to reset 1 time operation,
set the ACT/INH item to [INH] and then reset it to[ON].
● The motor (CH3) is controlled by SW-G. (Initial
setting) When changing the switch or stick which
controls the motor, first change Function of the
Linkage menu.
Note: When using this function, always check initial
operation with the propeller removed.

●Return to Model menu

● When using this function, Tap [INH].
● Group/single mode switching(For more information, see the description
at the back of this manual.)● Switch
A switch that turns the function itself
ON/OFF can be selected.
● Motor off position
Tap the motor off button when [SW-G] is in
the motor OFF position you want to set. The
direction of the motor switch is memorized.
The screen graph display OFF direction alsochanges.

● When using this function, Tap [INH].
● When you want to set the "One time mode",tap to the [One time] item and tap thescreen.
● Speed 1 to 2
The speed 1 and speed 2 region boundary
can be changed,● Operation speed adjustment
The speed when speed 1 and speed 2 are
ON (In) and OFF (Out) can be adjusted.

Notes● First decide the motor OFF direction, and then
set the speed. When you want to reset the
motor OFF direction, also reset the speed.
● We recommend that motor OFF be set incombination with F/S.
● Set the basic operation direction with the reverse
function to match the ESC used.
● Always set the motor OFF position.

150 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

V-Tail[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Tail type V-tailThis function lets you adjust for left and right rudder
angle changes at elevator and rudder operation of aV-tail airplane.
V-tail is when 2 servos are used together to control
rudder movement as elevators. In addition to eachrudder side moving up and down together, each side
moves in opposite directions when moving as elevators.
On a V-tail, this is also known as a ruddervator, as they
can serve the same purpose.

ELEVATOR(RUDDER 2)

RUDDER(ELEVATOR 2)● Select [V-Tail] at the model menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu
Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Elevator function)
Up and down travel adjustment at
CH1 and CH2 elevator operation(Rudder function)
Left and right travel adjustment at
CH1 and CH2 rudder operation● Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run outof travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

151 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Winglet[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, winglet(2RUD)

This function adjusts the left and right rudder
angles of airplanes with winglets.
It can be used for special airplanes with two
rudders. The amount of movement of the two
mounted rudder servos can be adjusted separately.
Two servos are operated with one rudder stick.

RUDDER 1

Winglet(at Flying
wing )RUDDER 2

Winglet(at Flying
wing )● Select [Winglet] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu

Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Rudder 1/2)
The travel at rudder stick left and right
operation can be individually set.

● Travel adjustment
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
Adjust the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
*If the mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).

152 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

MODEL MENU (Helicopter functions)This section contains information on the commands
that apply to helicopters only. For instructions
on airplane, glider and multicopter, refer to thesections pertaining to those aircraft.
Use the Model type function in the Linkage menu
to select the swash type matched to the fuselage
beforehand.
◆ Condition hold

When performing adjustments, such as idling up, when the engine isengaged, keep the throttle stable so as to prevent the engine from revving
too high. Once your adjustments are complete, always make sure to set
the function to [OFF].

Also, add flight conditions at the Condition Selectscreen if necessary before setting the model data at
each function. (Up to 8 conditions can be used)
The AFR function, dual rate function and otherfunctions common to all model types, are describedin a separate section.

*Condition hold ON/OFF operation is possible under normal conditions
and the throttle stick is more than 1/3rd into the slow throttle range.
Throttle servos will remain at the throttle stick position during ON
operation.

● ON/OFF operation on the Home screen

WARNING

Under the conditions described above, tap the Condition hold [OFF]For safety reasons, when performing individual displayed on the screen.
During function operation, Condition hold will display [ON] and an
adjustments it is recommended that you shut off
the engine and disconnect the motor to prevent alarm will sound.
rotation.

*Sudden, abrupt rotation can result in death or serious injury.

Model menu (Helicopter) functions table
Servo monitor

Displays the servo test and operation position

Condition selectFlight conditions addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming, and condition delay can be set.

AFR

Sets the angle and curve of all the operation functions.

Dual rate

D/R curve which can be switched with a switch, etc. can also be added.

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10 mixes can be used for each condition.

Pitch curve

Pitch curve and hovering trim adjustment

Throttle curve

Throttle curve and hovering trim adjustment

Acceleration

Allows a brief "overload" in response to sudden throttle and pitch commands

Throttle holdMoves the throttle to idle during autorotation

Swash mixing

Compensates for each control response

Throttle mixing

Compensates for power loss when cyclic applied

Pitch → Needle

Adjusts response curve in different flight conditions

Pitch → Rudder

Handles torque changes from pitch angle inputs

Gyro

Used to switch gyro sensitivity

Governor

Used to switch RPM of the helicopter’s head

Gyro setting

Detailed setting of CGY755/CGY760R

153 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Condition selectFlight condition's addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming,and condition delay can be set. [All model types]

The functions in the Model menu can be used byswitching the settings of up to 8 flight conditions
by using the Condition select function to add flight
conditions. Add conditions, as required.
When you do not want to use the Condition selectfunction, this setting is unnecessary. In this case,use the flight conditions assigned at initial setting.
● Since switching by stick and lever position, in
addition to ordinary toggle switch, is possible
as the flight condition selector switch, thisfunction can be linked with other operations.
● A Condition Delay function can be set.
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated
when there are sudden changes in the servo

positions and when there are variations in
the operating time between channels duringcondition switching can be suppressed. The
delay can be set for each channel.
When setting the delay function at theswitching destination condition, therelated function changes after a delay
corresponding to the set amount.
● When multiple conditions were set, theiroperation priority can be freely changed.
● The condition name can be changed. The
selected condition name is displayed on
the screen. When a condition has been
added, give it a name which can be easily
confirmed.

● Select [Condition select] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name

Conditions List

Condition Renaming

Condition Addition

1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to rename in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Rename] button.
3. Enter the new name from the
keyboard which appears on
the screen.
4. When the keyboard [Condition
name] key is tapped, the newname is registered.

1. When the [Add] button is tapped, theCondition Select screen appears.
*Only the number of buttons corresponding to theconditions which can be added are displayed.
2. Select the desired conditions by tapping
the buttons.
*The selected conditions are added to Conditions
List.
3. Tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen.
4. Select the switch to be used in condition
switching.
(See "Switch selection method" at the endof this manual for selection method
details.)
5. The "Condition1" data for the added
conditions is copied.

154 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Currently selected condition name

The ON/OFF switch ofcondition is chosen.

Conditions List

Condition Copy

Condition Remove

1. Tap the [Copy] button. The Copy screen
appears.
2. Select the condition by tapping the buttonof the copy source conditions.
3. Next, select the condition by tapping the
copy destination condition.
4. Tap the [Copy] button.
5. When the [Yes] button is tapped, the datais copied. (To abort copying, tap the [No]button.)1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to reset in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Remove] button.
3. When the [Yes] button istapped, the condition isreset. (To abort resetting, tap
the [No] button.)● Group/single mode switching (Gr./Sngl)(For a description of the operation
method, see the description at theback of this manual.)

Last condition has
the highest priority

Priority change
1. Tap the condition whose
priority you want to change
in Conditions List.
2. Change the priority with thepriority [ ] or [ ] button. (Thelast condition has the highest
priority.)*The initial setting condition
cannot be moved. It has thelowest priority.

Condition delay setting
1. Switch to the condition you want to set.
2. Tap the Delay button of the channel you
want to set.
3. Use the value input buttons to set the delay.
●Initial value: 0●Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)

155 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

AFR

The angle and curve of each operation function can be set. [All model types]

AFR function is used to adjust the throw andoperation curve of the stick, lever, and switch
functions for each flight condition.

This is normally used after End Point has defined
the maximum throw. When mixing is applied fromone channel to another channel, both channels
can be adjusted at the same time by adjusting theoperation rate through the AFR function.
● Operation curve adjustment: Three typesof curves (EXP1, EXP2, and Point) can beselected. A maximum 17 points curve can beused for the point curve type. (Initial setting:
9 points) The number of points can also be
increased and decreased and curves fromcomplex curves to simple curves can beused.
● Operation speed adjustment: The operation
speed of each function when the function
is operated (including at flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The function
operates smoothly at a constant speed
corresponding to the set speed.

When D/R is turned ON, the display willshow "D/R----", and the rudder angle (rate)and EXP can be set when D/R is ON.

● Select [AFR] at the model menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
Curve select
EXP1, EXP2, Point curve●Return to Model menu

Curve selectSeparately ⇔ Combination(Left and rightsymmetricalcurve.)
Left/right, Up/down, overall
adjustment at Rate A andRate B● Operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Function selection
1. When the function select button is tapped, a selection screen appears.
2. Select the function you want to set at the selection screen.

● Group/single mode switch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)● Servo speed setting(For a description of the setting
method, see the description at
the back of this manual.)

156 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Dual rate
D/R curves which can be switched by switch, etc.
can be added. The curve can be adjusted by the
AFR function.
● Up to 6 rates can be added for eachcondition.
● D/R is set for each condition and is notreflected at other conditions.
● D/R at the top of the D/R list has priority.

● Select [Dual rate] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu

The ON/OFF switch ofdual rate is chosen.

Activate the D/R function
by tapping the [INH] .

Rate, EXP settings
are on AFR function

When the function select button
is tapped, a selection screen
appears.
Select the function you want to
set at the selection screen.

● Setting rudder angle, EXP
On this D/R screen you can set functions andswitchover switches. Rudder angle (rate) and EXP
settings are performed on the AFR screen when
the D/R switch is ON.

157 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10
mixings can be used for each condition. [All model types]

Programmable mixing may be used to correctundesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also
be used for unusual control configurations. Mixing
means that the motion of a command channel,
called the "master," is added to the motion of themixed channel, called "slave."
You may choose to have the Masters trim added to
the Slave channel response, if you desire ("Trim"setting). The mixing curve can be changed sothat the undesired tendencies can be corrected
effectively by setting the EXP1/EXP2/Point modes.

Offset-type mixing applies a fixed offset or presetto the programmed channel servo operation andmay control up to four circuits simultaneously.
The Programmable mixing includes a powerful linkfunction, which allows Programmable mixing to belinked with the special mixing functions, or withother programmable mixing functions. The linkfunction can be set up for Master and Slave channel
individually.

● Tap the [Prog. mixes] button in the Model menu to callthe setup screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu
● Group/single modeswitch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information,
see the description
at the back of thismanual.)After this function is
activated, the masterand slave function
names (or offset mixing)
are displayed.

Mixing/Offset modeswitch● Operation curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the back ofthis manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH] .

Trim mode setting ON/OFF.

The ON/OFF switch ofprog. mixes is chosen.

Fine tuning trim
setting

Master function(or Stick, Switch, Dial)
is chosen.

The on time (start/stoptime) can be set up to 4
seconds. It is useful for
landing gear control of thejet or scale plane, etc.

Slave function is chosen.
Servo speed setting

158 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Setting methods●Group/single mode selection
Activating functions for only the selectedconditions:
1. Tap the [Gr] button and switch to the [Sngl ]mode.

*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the Gr
and Sngl modes.

●Mixing mode selection
Using the offset mode:
1. Tap the Mode button and switch to theOffset mode.

1. To turn the trim mode ON/OFF, tap the Trim
button on the screen.

*When mixing includes master side trim, set the Trim button
to [ON]. When mixing does not include master side trim, set
the Trim button to [OFF].
*Each time this button is pressed, it toggles between [ON]and [OFF].
*This is effective when the master channel is set by Function.

●Mixing curve type selection
1. Tap the curve type selection button of thecurve type you want to use to display theselection screen. Then, select the curve youwant to use.

*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the
Mixing and Offset modes.

*For a description of the curve setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

●Mixing setup screen selection
1. Tap the button of the mixing you want to
set. The mixing setup screen is displayed.
Activate the function.
2. Activate the function by tapping the [INH]button.

●Fine tuning trim setting
1. When using the curve fine tuning function,
tap the [--] button of the Fine Tuning item tocall the <Switch> screen and then select thelever, VR, etc. you want to use.

*Each time this button is tapped, it toggles between [INH]and [ON/OFF].

●Mixing ON/OFF switch setting and ON/OFF
direction switching*An ON/OFF switch is not set even when the function is
activated.

1. When you want to turn mixing ON/OFF byswitch, tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen and then select the switch and its ON
direction.
*For a description of the selection method, see [Switch
setting method] at the back of this manual.

*For a description of the fine tuning trim setting method, see
the description at the back of this manual.

●Servo speed setting
1. When setting the servo speed, tap the speed
button. The Servo speed setup screen isdisplayed.
*For a description of the servo speed setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.
*Offset mixing changes the speed. Use the Speed In andSpeed Out buttons to readjust the speed.
The mixing switch can set a delay with a different rate atstarting and stopping.
*This function is inactive when a mixing switch is not set.

●Master channel setting (except offset typemixing)1. Tap the Master button to call the Function
menu and select the master channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).
*Master channel control can be set to stick, VR, and othersimple travels which do not include End point, AFR, D/R,
mixing setting, etc. In this case, display the <Function,H/
W> screen by tapping the [Stick, Switch, Dial] button andthen select master channel side control.

●Slave channel setting
1. Tap the Slave button to call the Function
menu and select the slave channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
*Each time the button is pressed, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).

●Trim mode ON/OFF setting

159 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Pitch curve / Pitch trim
Pitch curveThis function adjusts the pitch operation curve foreach flight condition for the optimal flight state
relative to movement of the throttle stick.

● Select [Pitch curve] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

*Up to 17 points can be set for the point curve types.
However, when using the 3 points or 5 points specified tocreate a curve, a simple curve can be created by reducing
the number of input points to 3 or 5, and then entering thespecified value at the corresponding points that you createda curve.

Currently selected condition name●Return to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting

Point curve type is 9
points (initial), but for
simple use, 4~5 points
are sufficient.

*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Normal curve adjustment● For normal curve, usually use [Point] typeand create a basic pitch curve centeredabout hovering. Use this function together
with the THR curve (normal) function andadjust the curve so that up/down control isbest at a constant engine speed.
Idle up curve adjustment● For the high side pitch curve, set the
maximum pitch which does overload theengine. For the low side pitch curve, create
curves matched to loop, roll, 3D, andother purposes and use the idle up curves
according to the performance.

Operation precautions

WARNING
When actually starting the engine andflying, always set the idle up condition
switch to OFF and start the engine in
the idling state.

Throttle hold curve adjustment● The throttle hold curve is used when
executing auto rotation dives.

160 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Setting method● Group/Single item: When you also want to
input the same setting contents at otherconditions, perform setting in the groupmode. In this case, the same contents are
input to the other conditions set in the groupmode. When you want to set each condition
independently, select the single mode
(initial setting). Other conditions can be set
independently.

Curve setting examples
The screens shown below are curves created byentering the pitch rate at low, center, and high side (3points or 5 points) at each condition. When actuallycreating a curve, input the rate specified at thefuselage (or the reference value).

*For a description of the curve setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

●Pitch Curve (Example)
Normal Curve

Idle-up 1 Curve

Idle-up 2 Curve

Hold Curve

Pitch servo speed setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

161 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Pitch trim (Hovering pitch, high pitch, low pitch)

The hovering pitch, low pitch, and high pitch trim setup screen can be called from the Pitch curve setup
screen.
●Return to Model menu

Hovering pitch trim
setting

Hovering pitch trim
The Hovering Pitch trim function trims the pitch
near the hovering point. Normally, it is used withthe hovering condition. The hovering pitch can befine tuned for changes in rotor speed accompanying
changes in temperature, humidity, and other flight
conditions. Adjust the hovering pitch so thatrotor speed is constant. This function can be used
together with the hovering Throttle Trim function
for more delicate operation.
Setting method● When using only the hovering (normal)
condition, switch the group mode to thesingle mode (initial setting) before setting.
● Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)● Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: LD● The trim operation mode (Mode: Center/
Normal) can be selected.
Center mode: Maximum amount of change
near center by center trim operation(recommended)
Normal mode: Normal trim (parallel
movement trim) operation. The advantage
of using this mode is that the hovering pitch
can be adjusted without changing the
curve.
● Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
When this value is made small, trim can only
be used near the center.
● The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be changed.

Low/high pitch trim
settingHigh Pitch/Low Pitch Trim
High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim is the pitch servo highside and low side trim function.
Setting method● When setting the adjustment knobs common
to all the conditions, set them in the groupmode.
● Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)● Select the adjustment knobs.
Selection example: LS (high side), RS (lowside)
● The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be changed.
● Trim acts as high side or low side trim with thecenter as the standard.

162 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Throttle curve / Throttle Hover trim
Throttle curveThis function adjusts the throttle operation curvefor each condition for optimum engine speed tothrottle stick movement.
Up to 17 curve points can be set for the point
curve type. However, when the 5 points and other● Select [Throttle curve] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

point data is used, a simple curve can be easily
created by reducing the number of input points ofthe curve to 5 and entering the specified value atthe corresponding points.

Currently selected condition name●Return to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the back of thismanual.

Point curve type is 9
points (initial), but for
simple use, 4~5 points
are sufficient.

Throttle hover trim
operating position(White line)

Operation precautions

Normal curve adjustment● Normal curve creates a basic curve
centered around hovering. Use it alongwith the normal pitch curve and adjust sothat up/down control at a constant engine
speed is easiest.

WARNING
When actually starting the engine andflying, always set the idle up condition
switch to OFF and start the engine in
the idling mode.

Idle up curve adjustment● Set an idle up curve that maintains a
constant speed at all times, even during
operation which reduces the pitch
performed in flight. Create a curve matched
to loop, roll, 3D, or other purposes and theidle up curve according to the performance.

Setting method● Group/single item: When you want tosimultaneously enter the same settings toother functions, make the settings in thegroup mode. In this case, the same setting

contents are entered to the all conditions.
When you want to set each condition
independently, make the settings after
selecting the single mode (Initial setting).

163 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Curve setting examples
The curves shown below are created by using thepoint curve type and inputting the data of the 5
points 0% (low side), 25%, 50% (center), 75%,
100% (high) side at each condition. They are●Throttle Curve (Example)
Normal Curve

Idle-up 1 Curvecreated by reducing the number of points on theline to 5. When actually creating a curve, enter
the data specified per the aircraft (or the reference
value).
*For a description of the curve creation method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.
Idle-up 2 Curve

Throttle servo speed setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Throttle Hover trim

The Throttle Hover trim setup screen can be called from the Throttle curve setup screen.
●Return to Model menu

The Throttle Hover function trims the throttle near
the hovering point. Normally, use it with hovering
conditions. Changes in rotor speed accompanying
changes in the temperature, humidity, and otherflight conditions can be trimmed. Adjust the throttle
so that rotor rotation is most stable. More delicate
trimming is also possible by using this function
along with the Hover Pitch function.
Setting method● When using the hovering (normal) condition
only, switch the group mode to the single
mode (initial setting) and make the settings.
● Tap [INH]. (ON is displayed.)● Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: RD● The trim operation mode (Mode: Center/
Normal) can be selected.
Center mode: Maximum rate of change
near center by center trim operation(recommended)
Normal mode: Normal trim (horizontal
movement trim) operation.
● Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
When the value is made small, trim acts only
near the center.
● The trim rate can be adjusted and theoperation direction can be set.

164 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Acceleration
This function is used to adjust the pitch andthe throttle rise characteristic at acceleration/
deceleration operation. An acceleration function
which temporarily increases the pitch and throttle
operations at throttle stick acceleration/deceleration
operation can be set.
Example of acceleration function use●When used at pitch, the acceleration
function is effective when you want toquicken the response of the fuselage at 3D
flight flip, etc.
When used, high pitch temporarily exceeds
maximum pitch, but immediately returns tomaximum pitch.

● Select [Acceleration] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

To next page
1/2 : Pitch
2/2 : Throttle
Operation up to thisrange will initiate
acceleration.

●Return to Model menu

Act position

The rate the angle
increases.

Current position

The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.

（First return）1 ～ 100（Slow return）（Acceleration doesn't function as 0.）

Setting method● Acceleration can be set at both setting
at acceleration (high) and setting at
deceleration (low).
(The operation point is displayed on agraph.)● Acceleration rate setting (Rate)● The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.

● The operation point at accelerationand deceleration can be set. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration is
performed.
Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the pitch stroke is large, make yoursettings so there is no binding of your linkage.

165 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Throttle hold

Example of use

This function sets the throttle cut position for
autorotation. The throttle position can also be set toan idling position. Setting of these 2 positions canbe selected by switch. This allows use for switching
during training.
● Select [Throttle hold] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

● Since throttle hold has 2 modes (Cut) and(Idle), using it in the Idling mode during
training and in the Cut mode when
stopping the engine at contest, etc. isconvenient.
Note: When throttle hold is set to ON in the normal
condition, throttle hold acts and the throttle servo
is deactivated. Always set throttle hold to ON in thehold condition.

●Return to Model menu
Current position
Set to the engine
stop position.

Set to the idling
position.

Hold position

Engine cut setting

Engine idle setting

Setting method

Operation precautions● Operation mode selection
Manual mode(Manual): The throttle holdfunction is operated by switch operation
only.
Auto mode(Auto): The throttle hold function
operation is linked to the throttle stick
position.
Auto position setting: When the auto mode isselected, the throttle position (auto position)
can be selected. Move the throttle stick to
the position you want to set and tap thescreen. (Auto position is displayed.)● Hold position adjustment
Throttle Hold (Cut) sets the throttle cut
position. Adjust it so that the carburetor is fully
closed.
Throttle Hold (Idle): Make this adjustment tomaintain idling for training. Adjustments canbe made based on the throttle curve idle
position.
● The throttle servo operating speed can be
adjusted. (Speed)● Throttle cut or training function can beswitched by hold function selector switch.

WARNING
When starting the engine, confirm thatthe idle up condition and throttle holdcondition are OFF.

166 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Swash mixing

Example of use

The swash mix function is used to correct the swash
plate in the aileron (roll) direction and elevator(cyclic pitch) corresponding to each operation ofeach condition.
Adjustment by independent curve for aileron,elevator, and pitch operations is possible. The
operation can be smoothly adjusted by calling up
the “Curve setup” screen by tapping the mixing
item that corresponds to the mixing and direction
which needs correction.

● As an example, use swash mixing to correctundesirable tendencies in the roll direction.
● For a condition which uses Aileron to
Elevator, set this function to ON. Whenraising the nose at a right roll, when theRate B side is input and the right aileron is
operated, the elevator moves to the downside. Tune by adjusting the Rate. For rightroll, adjust to the rate A side.

● Select [Swash mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)●Return to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Setting method● When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)● When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
● The correction rate can be set by curve.
● A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the swash mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap to
the [--] item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

167 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Throttle mixing
This function corrects slowing of engine speed
caused by swash plate operation during aileronor elevator operation. The method of applying
clockwise or counterclockwise torque when
pirouetting can also be corrected.
An acceleration function which temporarily
increases the throttle side correction rate relative torapid stick operation can also be set.
● Select [Throttle mixing] at the model
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

When correction is necessary, tap to the mixing
item corresponding to the mixing that needs
correction and tap the screen to call the curve setup
screen, and then correct the slowing.
Setting example● Aileron to Throttle applies a load to theengine and corrects slowing of theengine speed when the aileron stick was
operated. Engine racing can be adjusted
independently at the right aileron and left
aileron by Rates A and B.
"CTRM" : The correction
rate maximum when
the throttle stick iscentered.
"Linear" : Correction
applied for the entire
throttle range.

●Return to Model menu

● Mixing curve setting*For a description of the curve setting method,
see the description at the back of this manual.

<Acceleration function setting>Setting method● When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)● When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
● The correction rate can be set by curve.
● A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the swash mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap to
the [--] item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

● Acceleration can be set for both settings(Left) and (Right)● Acceleration rate setting (Rate)● The return time (Damping) after operation
can be set.
● The operation point (Act position) when thecorrection rate is increased and decreased
can be set independently. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration
operation is performed.

168 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Pitch → Needle
This mixing is used when the engine is equippedwith needle control or other fuel-air mixture
adjustment. A needle curve can be set.
An acceleration function which temporarily

increases needle operation at throttle stick
acceleration/deceleration operation can be set.
The rise characteristic of the needle servo atacceleration and deceleration operation can be
adjusted.

● Select [Pitch→Needle] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu
● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Normally, use [Point] type.

Setting method● When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)● When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
● A needle curve can be set.
● A switch can be set.
When [--] is set, the mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap
to the [--] item. Tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

< Acceleration function setting>●Acceleration can be set at both
acceleration (high) and deceleration (low).
●The acceleration rate (rate) and the return
time after operation (damping) can be set.
●An operation point (Act position) at
acceleration and deceleration can be set.
When an operation point was exceeded,
acceleration operation is performed.

169 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Pitch → Rudder (Revolution mixing)
Use this mix when you want to suppress thereaction torque generated by main rotor pitch andspeed changes during pitch operation. Adjust sothat the nose does not move in the rudder direction.
An acceleration function which temporarily
increases the correction rate at throttle stick
acceleration/deceleration operation can be set. The
mixing rate at acceleration/deceleration can be set.

However, when a GY Series or other heading holdgyro is used, since correction is performed by thegyro, this mix is not used. If this function is used
when the gyro operation mode is the AVCS mode,
the neutral position will change.

●Select [Pitch→Rudder]at the model menu
and call the setup
screen shown.
● Mixing curve setting

Normally, use [Point] type.

*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Setting method● When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)● When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
● A mixing curve is set.

<Normal condition mixing curve><Idle up condition mixing curve>

The mixing curve rate starts from a smallvalue.
For a rotor with a clockwise operation
direction (polarity), when pitch was
operated at the plus side, set so thatmixing is in the clockwise direction. First,
trim at hovering and then adjust theneutral position.
1. Adjustment between slow and hovering
Repeatedly hover from take off and land
from hovering at a constant rate matched
to your own rhythm, and adjust the pitch
so the nose does not deflect when thethrottle is raised and lowered.
2. Throttle high side (climbing and diving fromhovering)
Repeat climbing and diving from hovering
at a constant rate matched to your own
rhythm and adjust the pitch so that thenose does not deflect when the throttle israised and lowered.

Set the mixing rate so that the rudder
direction at high-speed flight is straightahead. Adjust for each condition used.

<Acceleration function setting>● Acceleration operation can be performed
for both setting at acceleration (High)and setting at deceleration (Low).
● Acceleration rate setting (Rate)● The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
● An operation point (Act position) at
acceleration and deceleration can be set
independently. When an operation point
was exceeded, acceleration operation is
performed.

170 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Gyro[Helicopter]

This function is used to adjust gyro sensitivity. The
sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/
AVCS mode) can be set for each condition.
The gyro sensitivity can be switched with eachcondition or the switch. (3 sensitivities)*Compatible with 3 axis gyro (CGY750).
● Select [Gyro] at themodel menu and callthe setup screen.

Gyro（RUD)
setting

Note: [Gyro] [Gyro2] [Gyro3] Default function[Gyro]: CH6(FASSTest12CH) CH5(Other system type)[Gyro2] : CH9[Gyro3] : CH10
Always set to [--] both (control) and (trim) for
the [Gyro] function at the Function menu in
the Linkage menu.

Gyro2（AIL)
settingGyro3（ELE)
setting●Return to Model menu

Tapping these willpull up the detailed
selection screen for
each.
Rate1 Gyro type andgain

The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) andsensitivity of the 3axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.

Rate2 Gyro type andgain
Rate3 Gyro type andgain
When using Rate2/Rate3, make it
INH → ON or OFF.
Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

Use this when you wantto adjust sensitivity via
VR, etc., and not onscreen data entry. Tap "-", select "VR", etc., andthen tap the value toadjust. (Won't operate
when value is "0".)The ON/OFF switchof gyro is chosen.
3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment

Setting method● When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)● When you want to set the same contents atother conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
● Three rates can be switched for eachcondition. (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3)● A fine tuning VR can be set.

171 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Usage example #1: Using gyro for only the rudder and adjusting sensitivity for each condition＊ Gyro gain channel
Gyro : CH5
For the FASSTest12CH, Gyro/RUD is 6ch. The gyro sensitivity adjustment connector connects to 6ch.

● Select [Gyro] at themodel menu and callthe setup screen.

This is all that is needed
for use in this case.

Tapping here will let you
select either Normal or
AVCS.
Because thesensitivity is switched(Sngl) per condition,
Rate 2 and Rate 3 are
not used.

Set gain of a rudder

Because sensitivity changes forhovering and idleup, perform
switchover for each condition andadjust sensitivity.

Usage example #2: Using 3-axis gyro CGY750 and adjusting sensitivity for each condition＊ Gyro gain channel
Gyro RUD : CH5 For the FASSTest12CH, Gyro/RUD is 6ch.
Gyro2 AIL : CH9
Gyro3 ELE : CH10
For the CGY750, simply connect the S.BUS; functions do not need to be set.
(For the FASSTest12CH, change Gyron/RUD to 6ch.)● Select [Gyro] at themodel menu and callthe setup screen.

This is all that is needed
for use in this case.

Tapping here will let
you select either Normal
or AVCS for each of thethree axes.
Set gain of a rudder

Set gain of an aileronSet gain of an elevator

Because thesensitivity is switched(Sngl) per condition,
Rate 2 and Rate 3 are
not used.

Because sensitivity changes forhovering and idleup, perform
switchover for each condition andadjust sensitivity.

172 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Governor
When using a Futaba governor, this function isused to switch the RPM of the helicopter's head.
Up to 3 rates can be set for each condition.
*The governor is used by connecting the governor speed
setting channel to CH7 (initial setting).
*When using an independent governor [ON]/[OFF] switch,connect the AUX([ON]/[OFF]) connector of the governor toCH8 (initial setting) and set the switch to CH8 (Governor2)
at the Function menu of the Linkage menu.

*When using the Fuel Mixture function, the mixture servo
is controlled from the governor. When transmitting the
mixture curve data from the transmitter to the governor, thegovernor AUX (m.trm) connector must be connected to CH8(initial setting) and governor side setting performed. See thegovernor instruction manual.
Note: Always set (Control) and (Trim) to [--] for[Governor] and [Governor 2] of the Function menuof the Linkage menu.

● Select [Governor] at the model menu
and call the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu
RPM adjustment
Fine tuning VR settings

Unit display selection:[%] [rpm]

Setting method●Activate the mixing
When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.)*When the function is set ON/OFF at the governor setup
screen, the governor rpm setting channel end point servo
travel and limit point are now initialized.
*When changed from INH to ACT (ON), the servo travel isinitialized to 100 and the limit point is initialized to 155.
*When operation is changed to INH at all conditions, theservo travel is initialized to 100 and the limit point isinitialized to 135.

●RPM adjustment
Tap to the rate item.
Adjust the rpm using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons.
Initial value: 50% (1500rpm)
Adjustment range: OFF, 0~110% (OFF,
700~3500rpm)*When the value is tapped reset to the initial value.

●Unit display selection
Tap to the UNIT item [%] [rpm]. Select the
unit.

173 →

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

●Diplay mode selection●Fine tuning VR settings*When [rpm] mode is selected above setting, the display
mode can be selected.
* There is no change in the transmitter output even when the"Mode" is changed. Calibration should be performed via thegovernor.
* In order to use the Governor function of the T16IZ, it isnecessary to change the settings on the governor for the low
side 700 rpm mode.

When the Mode of the Governor screen's
model menu is changed, the change is also
indicated on-screen.

Tap to the [--] item and tap the screen toaccess the selection screen. Select thecontrol.

*For a description of the switch selection method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

Tap to the rate item.
Adjust the trim rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲""▲▲" buttons.
Initial value: 0% (0rpm)
Adjustment range: -20~+20%*When the screen is tapped for one second, the sensitivity is
reset to the initial value.

Tap the screen to return to the cursor mode.

main rotor R.P.M.

The chart below indicates themode percentage and thecorresponding RPM.
3900rpm
3500rpm

2700rpm

2500rpm
2100rpm
1500rpm2000rpm

1000rpm
700rpm0%50% : neutral 100% 110%main rotor R.P.M. setting channel travel

174 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Gyro setting
The T16IZ has the same functions as the GPB-1.
The CGY755 / CGY760R can be set up from the
T16IZ screen by connecting to the T16IZ. Somefunctions can be set wirelessly.
*CGY760R needs to be Ver3.0 ~. Update CGY760R.

A. Wired connection: Advanced settings (all functions same as GPB-1)
T16IZ
CGY755/CGY760R

Notes
If the T16IZ and gyro are not connected, thegyro setting value cannot be changed.
● Connect the receiver battery (3.5 to 8.4 V) to
one of the "AIL" to "S.B2" connectors otherthan "RPM" and "P.BOX".

P.BOX

S.I/F

(Do not connect to "RPM" and "P.BOX".)CGY Connection Cable (included with gyro)

B. Wireless tunings: Gyro tunings can be made wirelessly. (Limited items)
T16IZ

CGY755/CGY760R

Notes
When using the wireless tuning function, set
the telemetry function to ACT.
The wireless tuning can be FASSTest or

T-FHSS.

S.BUS2 Receiver
Do not set during flight. Make settings when
the aircraft is on the ground and the motorand engine are stopped.

For CGY755(For CGY760R Use other receiver)

Wireless Tunings function list
-FLT. TUNE
Base Gain: Gyro base gain setting
CYC. Rt: Cyclic rate setting
Cnt. AuthAIL: Control Authority AileronCnt. AuthELE: Control Authority Elevator
EXPO.: Exponential
FLT. Styl: Flight style
ELE. Comp: Elevator pre compensation-SWH. BASIC
SWS. Rate: Rate adjustment
PIT. Rate: Rate adjustment
SWS. Ring- Governor BasicGOV Gain: Governor gain
L Lmt. L rpm : Low limit hovering RPM
L Lmt. H rpm : Low limit idling RPM-Flight Tune Expert
HeadHld A : Head hold aileron
StopTune A : Stop tune aileron
HeadResp: Head Response
HeadHld E: Head hold elevator
StopTune E : Stop tune elevator-Rudder Expert
EXP. AVCS: Rudder exponential AVCS
EXP. NORM: Rudder exponential NORMAL
CNT. DlIn: Control delay in
CNT. DlOut: Control delay out
ANG: Pirouette speed
Tail Resp: Tail response

175 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

SETTING
A.  Wired connection: Advanced settings

1

CAUTIONBe sure to connect and disconnect the CGY760R/CGY755 and
T16IZ connection cable with the power off.

1. Select "Gyro setting" on the last page of
Helicopter Model Menu

*If "CRSF" is ON in the system type of the linkage
menu, "Gyro setting" cannot be selected.
* At this time, if Gyro is not connected to T16IZ by wire, the EQ
ID screen appears.

2
2. Select "Start"

When "GY Settings Transfer" isselected, the gyro setting data saved
in T16IZ is written to the gyro.

Select "Start" This will download
the gyro data to the T16IZ.

3

To basic menu

To expert menu
To receiver
3. Home screen is displayed◆ When copying data from Gyro A to Gyro B

Connect the gyro A to the T16IZ and press [Start]. (Enter the data of A into T16IZ)

If you press Start here, the B data will be written
to the T16IZ and the A data will be lost.

Connect Gyro B to T16IZ and press [GY Settings Transfer]. (Put data on A into gyro B)

176 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

SETTING
B. Wireless tunings
Before making Wireless tunings, it is necessary to download the setting data from the gyro to the T16IZ via a wired
connection.

First, wired connection

T16IZ

CGY755/CGY760R● Connect the receiver battery (3.5 to 8.4 V) to
one of the "AIL" to "S.B2" connectors otherthan "RPM" and "P.BOX".
(Do not connect to "RPM" and "P.BOX".)

P.BOX

S.I/F

CGY Connection Cable (included with gyro)

2

1

When "GY Settings Transfer" isselected, the gyro setting data saved
in T16IZ is written to the gyro.

2. Select "Start"
This will download the gyro data to the T16IZ.

1. Select “Gyro setting” on the last page of
Helicopter Model Menu

Next, Wireless tunings

Once the gyro data is stored in the T16IZ, if it is the same gyro, there is no need to make a wired connection from the second
time on. If you want to use another gyro, you need to reconnect the cable and download the data.
To configure the Wireless tunings, set two consecutive
free channels to use for Wireless tunings in SBUS Basic
4/4.

Linkage menu → Function
Example using 13CH and 14CH

Set Control and Trim to NULL ( -- ).

2 consecutive free channels

12

1. Select “Gyro setting” on the last page of
Helicopter Model Menu

2. Select "Start"

34

3. Select "Wireless Tuning"

Check that the gyro to be
set matches the EQ ID.

4. Items that can be set wirelessly are displayed

177 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Home Screen

Home Screen Display
On the home screen, basic information such as swash type,gyro operation mode, sensitivity and governor ON / OFF,engine operating time etc, are displayed.

Condition number

With switch operation from the transmitter, several parameters can be switched by
setting up to 5 types of data. If you set the condition switch to the channel having
the AFR function of the transmitter and set the point for each flight condition with the
AFR point curve, it can also be linked with the flight condition switch.
• When either the DG1 or DG 2 switch is selected, the following options are available.

For functions that can set conditions inthis manual, mark Cond is written.

Function Menu of your transmitter (DG1). Assigning DG1 to a switch or flight mode allows theuse of two separate values for the condition selectable parameters.

Ｃond1 (Condition 1)●SWS.Rate●PIT.Rate●SWS.Ring●FLT.Styl

Switch DG1●Cnt.AuthAI●Cnt.AuthEL●EXPO●ELE.Comp●HeadHld A●HeadHld E●StpTune A●StpTune E●HeadResp

Ｃond2 (Condition2)●SWS.Rate●PIT.Rate●SWS.Ring●FLT.Styl●Cnt.AuthAI●Cnt.AuthEL●EXPO●ELE.Comp●HeadHld A●HeadHld E●StpTune A●StpTune E●HeadResp●BaseGain AI EL●CYC.Rt●GOV.Gain●L Lmt.H rpm●L Lmt.L rpm●BaseGain AI EL●CYC.Rt●GOV.Gain●L Lmt.H rpm●L Lmt.L rpm*Indicates when the setup style is "3D".

Switch Channel Rate

-100%

Cond1

-35%

0%

35%

Cond2

100%

Narrow
NeutralWide• If you set a condition switch channel, using the AFR function on that channel set a flat point
curve for each flight condition. Then you can utilize all 5 flights conditions.

Switch Channel Rate
-100%

Cond1

-75%

-25%

Cond2

Neutral
0%

25%

Cond3

75%

Cond4

100%

Cond5

100%
0%

Swash plate type

Displays the swash plate type set in"SWH. BASIC" menu.

-100%

Set the point curve with AFR for each flight condition of the transmitter.

Battery voltage

Displays the voltage of thereceiver battery connected
to CGY.

Gyro operation mode /Gyro gain
Displays "AVCS" or "Normal" operation
mode and gyro gain of aileron (roll),elevator (pitch) and rudder (yaw) axis.

Governor ON / OFF

Roll and Elevator rate maximum display

Indicates the ON / OFF switch status of thegovernor function. When "ON" is displayed, thegovernor function is activated.

This screen displays the maximum roll rate and maximum elevator rate recorded during flight. Data is reset when the power isturned off. If you want to check the maximum rate, leave the power on after flight. Press and hold rate button to reset the display.

RPM display

The maximum RPM of the engine or rotor head RPM
memorized by the governor during operation is displayed.
Data is reset when the power is turned off. If you want tocheck multiple times during the flight, leave the power onafter flight. Press and hold RPM button to reset the display.

Engine running time

Displays the running time of the engine. Up to 9,999
hours are displayed.
Press and hold time button to reset the display. The
operation time is stored in memory even when the
power is turned off until it is reset.

178 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Home Screen
Home Screen

Basic menu screen◆ Flight Tune（Aileron, Elevator）◆ Swash Basic（Swash）◆ Rud Basic（Rudder）◆ Gov Basic（Governor）◆ S.BUS Basic
Expert menu screen◆ Swash Detail（Swash）◆ Flight Tune Expert（Aileron）◆ Rudder Expert（Rudder）◆ Governor Expert（Governor）

Receiver screen◆ Internal Rx◆ RF type179 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Basic Menu
As the name suggests, this menu allows changes to the basic settings of CGY.
Make sure to set each "BASIC MENU".
Basic menu screen◆ Flight Tune（Aileron, Elevator）◆ Swash Basic（Swash）◆ Rud Basic（Rudder）◆ Gov Basic（Governor）◆ S.BUS Basic

180 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

S.BUS Basic Menu
The "SBUS BASIC" screen is accessed via the "BASIC MENU" screen. Set the CH for each function according to the transmitter to be used.
Any unused functions should be set to INH (Inhibited). For example, if the Gain A/E and Gain RUD remote gain functions are not going to
be used, then set them to [INH]. The CGY760R/CGY755 will then allow you to make gain adjustments within the respective menu.
WARNING
Always verify that the S.BUS function assignments match your transmitter’s function(in the FUNCTION menu) assignments. If any
changes are made within the transmitter function assignments, then it will also be necessary to make the changes within the S.BUS
function assignments. To change the channel,
CGY and T16IZ must be connected.

The channel of each function
can be changed.

ELE2 channel Servo Type(If you want to use the ELE2 port for purposes other than swash.)This selects the ELE2 servo types. There are three types of the servo
driving frequency selection, AN:70 Hz, DG285 Hz, and 760 μS. All Futaba
digital servos can be operated with fastest DG:285 Hz mode but someof other brands of servos do not support DG:285 Hz mode. In this case,select the proper servo driving frequency per the manufacturer’s specifications.
If you select H4-00 or H4-45 with 4 servo swashes, cannot set this ELE2
port servo type. In that case, select all swash servo types in SWH basic
servo type.
Setting: AN:70 Hz /DG:760 μS /DG:285 Hz Initial setting: DG:285 Hz

WARNING
The servo type parameter within the CGY must match the type ofservo you are using. Incorrect setting may damage the CGY or the
servo. Incorrect setting may also result in a loss of control during
flight.

S. BUS connection: Condition on change channel
Using the methodology described previously, determine the "Cond CH #" andset the condition change channel of the transmitter. In this example, DG1 is theconditional change channel.

As with the flight condition function of the transmitter, it is possible to utilize
pre-determined settings, each activated by a switch or switches on thetransmitter. By setting the condition switch on the channel with the AFR
function of the transmitter and setting the point for each flight condition with
the AFR point curve, you can switch the condition of CGY760R/CGY755 inconjunction with the flight condition switch of the transmitter.

This resets the S.BUS channel assignments back to the defaults.

2 consecutive free channels

Wireless channel
The wireless channel uses two consecutive channels. For example, if CH13
is set to "# 1", CH14 is automatically set to "# 2". Therefore, when using thisfunction, two consecutive free channels are required for the transmitter. It is notpossible to use a channel assign that is used for another function.

CAUTIONBe sure to check the operation for all conditions 1 to 5 before flying.
The setting of "wireless CH" is possible only when the transmitterand the CGY are powered off and the CGY is turned on.
Be sure to connect and disconnect the CGY and T16IZ connection cablewith the power off.

181 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Swash BasicThis menu is utilized to perform the basic setup of swash motion.
"SWH. BASIC" screen from the "BASIC MENU" screen.
The CGY760R/CGY755 is compatible with the following six types
swash plate.

WARNING
Do not connect the servo to the gyros until you select the
servo type in the "SWH. BASIC" menu.
*If the servo type is incorrect, it is possible to damage the servos or CGY.

The green display is the current state.

(1) Setup style
3D mode contains a proven set of parameters which are good for not
only 3D but also F3C flying. F3C Mode and L.SCALE (Large scalemodel) Mode are for unique or special tuning types only.
*When the style is changed, setting of AIL/ELE/RUD is re-initialized anddefaults are changed.
L.SCALE: Initial parameter mode corresponding to a large machine with a
total length of 2.5 m or more.

(2) Gyro Set Dir: Mounting direction
Set the roll axis, pitch axis, yaw axis according to the mounting directionof CGY. When the LED on the Gx side finishes blinking, please turn the
power off and on again to confirm that it is working properly.
Setting: 1 ~6    Initial setting: 1

WARNING

If you do not turn the power back on after changing "Gyro Set Dir", the gyro
will not operate properly, there is a risk of crashing.

Gyro Set Dir--- 4
Gyro Set Dir--- 1

CGY755 has no antenna

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

Gyro Set Dir--- 5

Gyro Set Dir--- 2*Depending on the type of mounting plate,
it is also possible to mount as shown in
the figure.

Gyro Set Dir--- 3

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

Gyro Set Dir--- 6*Depending on the type of mounting plate,
it is also possible to mount as shown in
the figure.

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N(3) Servo Type
This selects the swash servo types. There are four types or modes of the servo driving
frequency selection, AN:70 Hz, DG:95 Hz, DG:140 Hz, DG285 Hz, and 760 μS. All Futaba
digital servos can be operated with fastest DG:285 Hz mode but some of other brands ofservos do not support DG:285 Hz mode. In this case, select the proper servo driving frequency per the manufacturer’s specifications.
Setting: AN:70 Hz /DG:95 Hz /DG:140 Hz /DG:760μS /DG:285 Hz
Initial setting: DG:285 Hz

WARNING
The servo type parameter within the CGY must match the type of servo you areusing. Incorrect setting may damage the CGY or the servo. Incorrect setting may
also result in a loss of control during flight.

182 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Swash Basic(4) SWASH Type: Swash change to plate type
Select the swash plate type. When you change the setting, other data is
initialized.
Setting: H-1 / H3-120 / H3-140 / H3-90 / H4-00 / H4-45

Initial setting: H3-120

WARNINGAll of the swash plate parameters are reset when the swash plate
type is changed. Doing so eliminates any possible errors or malfunctions within the system. After changing the swash plate type,
Please proceed through the entire setup process once again before
attempting to fly the model.

FRONT

H3-140H3-120
PIT
PIT

H3-90
AIL

AIL
PIT

ELE

ELE

ELE

H4-45

H4-00
ELE
PIT

AIL

ELE

H-1
AIL
PIT

AIL

ELE2

PIT

ELE2

AIL

ELE

AIL---------------------Aileron servo
ELE------------------ Elevator servo
PIT----------Collective pitch servo
ELE2----- Second elevator servo

Your transmitter should be reset to the default settings and the swash plate
type selected with the transmitter should be set to "H-1" or single servo
mode. All CCPM mixing is set up and handled in the CGY, and the transmitter functions should not be used. Before starting model set-up, be sure thatall dual rates, pitch curve, and endpoint values are set to 100/100.

Swash Type

H-1

(5) Servo Dir #: Servo direction #Using different servo combinations will create the proper swash plate servo
movement in electronic CCPM models (eCCPM). In the H3-xx swash
mode, three of the swash servos directions are changed by pressing theServo Dir #. Choose the combination number which produces level swash
plate travel with a collective pitch input from the transmitter. There are 8
combination choices for the H3-xx swash mode. On H4-xx swash mode,
there are 16 combination choices. After selecting the combination number,aileron, elevator, pitch, and 2nd elevator servo parameters are automatically set.
Note: Occasionally the aileron or elevator function directions are reversed
even though collective pitch direction is correct. In this case, use the "SWS.
Dir parameter on the following screen (4/6) to fix this later.

183 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Swash Basic(6)AIL, ELE, PIT. Ntr:
Servo neutral adjustment
Adjust the neutral position of the swash servo (aileron, elevator, pitch,second elevator). The second elevator (ELE2) is displayed only when theswash type is H4-xx.
Setting ranges: +240 ~ -240    Initial value: 0(7) SWS. Dir: Swash direction settingThis selects the aileron, elevator and collective pitch direction. Reverse
the direction when the stick movement and swash movement are opposite. Each time you press the +/- button, the polarity switches.

(8) SWS. Rate: Rate adjustment*The current condition number of CGY is displayed.
*The setting with "C#" display can be set for each condition.
1. Use the "C#" button to select the condition number.
2. Next, adjust value of the condition selected by the r a t ebutton.

For functions that can set conditions inthis manual, mark Cond is written.

Cond

The Swash Rate settings are used to set a known base cyclic throw for the
gyro to calculate the compensations and gain scale. This value does not
represent the total cyclic throw, but rather shows the gyro a known point
for the gyro to understand the helicopters geometry. It is important to notethat one setting applies to both roll and pitch axes; they are not individually
adjusted.
(DUAL RATES MUST BE 100)
-Suggested amount of base cyclic pitch*800 size – 10 degrees*700 size – 9 degrees*600 - 550 size – 8 degrees*500 size – 7 degrees*450 and below- 6 degrees
Setting ranges: 0 ~100%   Initial value: 50%(9) PIT. Rate: Rate adjustment

Cond

The [PIT.Rate] is the amount of collective pitch travel allowed. A goodstarting range for Sport, 3D and F3C is +/-10 to +/-12 degrees.
Setting ranges: 0 ~100    Initial value: 50%(10) SWS. Ring

Cond

This parameter is used to set the total maximum of cyclic throw as well as
limit the swash travel to prevent binding of the swash plate servos when thecontrol stick is moved toward a corner (for example, full right and full aft cyclic).
Setting ranges: 50 ~100%    Initial value: 130%(11) AGy. Dir: Aileron (roll) Gyro direction
EGy. Dir: Elevator (pitch) Gyro direction
This parameter controls which direction the CGY (roll / pitch axis) willcompensate when the helicopter rolls (pitches). Pick the helicopter up
and roll the helicopter to the right. The CGY should compensate by adding left cyclic to the swash plate. (Pick the helicopter up and rotate thenose of the helicopter downward. The CGY should compensate by adding
aft cyclic to the swash plate.)
If the CGY compensates in the wrong direction, then it will be necessary
to reverse the compensation direction setting.

WARNING
Verify that the CGY compensates in the correct direction before
flight. If the compensation direction is incorrect the model will rollor pitch uncontrollably even before it leaves the ground.
Be sure to set this aileron motion direction and elevator motion direction
so that F/F mixing (Ele Comp and Rud. F/F menu) works effectively. Also,
please perform this operation after setting the direction of operation.

(13) STK. Dir ELE: Elevator operation(12) STK. Dir AIL: Aileron operation

Load the direction of elevator into the gyro.
[Setting method] Touch the "Up" button to enter the setting mode.
"Sure?" Is displayed. Operate the elevator stick fully to the up. If you touch
the [Yes] button, the operation direction of elevator is memorized.

Load the direction of Aileron into the gyro.
[Setting method] Touch the "Right" button to enter the setting mode.
"Sure?" Is displayed. Operate the Aileron stick fully to the right. If you
touch the [Yes] button, the operation direction of Aileron is memorized.

WARNING
Verify that the CGY compensates in the correct direction before
flight. If the compensation direction is incorrect the model will rollor pitch uncontrollably even before it leaves the ground.

184 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Swash Basic(14) Pit. High: Pitch high memorizing
This parameter saves the full positive collective pitch point into the CGY.
[Setting method] Touch the "Pit. High" rate button to enter the setting
mode. Operate the throttle stick fully to the high. Touch the “Pit. High” rate
button again. ”Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch the [Yes] button. The fullpositive pitch signal will be saved to the CGY.

(15) Pit. Zero: Pitch zero memorizing
This parameter saves the zero collective pitch point into the CGY.
[Setting method] Touch the "Pit. Zero" rate button to enter the setting
mode. Operate the throttle stick to 0 degree pitch. Touch the “Pit. Zero” rate
button again. “Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch the [Yes] button. The zero
pitch signal will be saved to the CGY.

(16) Pit. Low: Pitch low memorizing
This parameter saves the full negative collective pitch point into the CGY.
[Setting method] Touch the "Pit. Low" rate button to enter the setting
mode. Operate the throttle stick fully to the low. Touch the “Pit. Low” rate
button again. “Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch the [Yes] button. The full
negative pitch signal will be saved to the CGY.

185 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Flight Tune（Aileron / Elevator Basic settings）
Flight tune sets control of helicopter roll (aileron) and pitch (elevator) axis. "FLT.
TUNE" screen from the "BASIC MENU" screen.

(1) Base. Gain: Gyro base gain setting

Cond

This sets the Cyclic Gyro Base Gain. If the Rotor Head Gain (Rot HD Gn)
Channels are set to "INH" within the CGY "SBUS.BASIC" menu, then the
remote transmitter gain adjustment is not available. Thus the actual working gain for the cyclic gyros is set by using the "Base Gain" button within
this parameter.
Set to 100, a transmitter Gain value of 100% will display 100% on thisparameter. If a pilot is in need of more gain, base gain can be increased toallow the gain on the CGY to be higher than 100%.
Note: If using a 6 CH or less "Base Gain" is equivalent to the rotor headgain and can be adjusted manually on the gyro instead of via the transmitter.
Setting ranges: 0 ~150%    Initial value: 100%(2) CYC. Rt: Cyclic rate setting

Cond

Cyclic rate sets the maximum Cyclic rate sets the maximum roll and flip
rate (d/s) as limited by the model’s ability to reach that set rate. Flip androll rates are set together with this single parameter.
Setting ranges: 10 ~500 d/s    Initial value: 300 d/s

186 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Flight Tune（Aileron / Elevator Basic settings）(3) Cnt. AuthAIL: Control Authority Aileron

Cond

Aileron Control Authority changes the rate at which the gyro will try toachieve the set "CYC. Rt". A higher value will create a quicker accelerated
reaction to a stick input to reach and stabilize to the "CYC. Rt" value; alower value will reach the desired "CYC. Rt" slower and accelerate slower
to the desired angular rate.
Note: Setting this value too high could lead to a jerky feeling when making rapid stick corrections, a value too low will give you the impression themodel is not following the pilot’s stick inputs. Values of between 20-60 are
the suggested range for most helicopters.
Setting ranges: 0 ~100%    
Initial value: Cnt. AuthAIL   = 40%(4) Cnt. AuthELE: Control Authority Elevator

Cond

Elevator Control Authority changes the rate at which the gyro will try toachieve the set "CYC. Rt". A higher value will create a quicker accelerated
reaction to a stick input to reach and stabilize at the "CYC. Rt" value; alower value will reach the desired "CYC. Rt" slower and accelerate slower
to the desired angular rate.
Note: Setting this value too high could lead to a jerky feeling when making rapid stick corrections, a value too low will give you the impression themodel is not following the pilot’s stick inputs. Values of between 20-60 are
the suggested range for most helicopters.
Setting ranges: 0 ~100%   
Initial value: Cnt. AuthELE = 40%(5) EXPO.: Exponential

Cond

Tune the exponential as desired to change the feel of the cyclic controls
around center stick. Negative values soften control feel; Positive values
increase sensitivity.
Note: that any exponential present in the TRANSMITTER adds to the value
set in the CGY.
Setting ranges: -100 ~0~+100%    Initial value: -20%

(6) FLT. Styl: Flight style

Cond

Increasing this value will create a more robotic reaction to the stick, leaving
the pilot with the impression that the model is locked into in a position after
an input. It will also tend to have a more calculated feeling when making
inputs.
-Lowering the value will make the model feel more fluid and easy to rotate withthe stick input. The model will feel a little more lively during faster cyclic movements and direction changes.
Setting ranges: 0 ~+100 n    Initial value: +50 n

187 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Flight Tune（Aileron / Elevator Basic settings）

Note: To effectively operate the next "ELE Comp"(elevator correction), make sure to set "Pit High", "PitZero", "Pit Low" on the "SWASH BASIC" menu.

(7) ELE. Comp: Elevator pre compensation

Cond

A helicopter that has a head that rotates clockwise, will exhibit a tendency
whereby the nose will be pulled towards the disk with positive blade pitch.
Conversely, the helicopter will push the nose away from the rotor disk during negative pitch inputs. In an instance of a slower servo set-up or larger(heavier) rotor blades, a small amount of elevator pre compensation may
be needed to keep the nose of the helicopter flat at all times during collective pitch changes. In most cases with helicopter high-speed servos
and standard 3D rotor blades, this function is not needed. If you do noticea slight tendency for the nose to try to rise or fall with collective input, increasing "ELE Comp" will reduce this behavior.
Setting ranges:  0 ~100%     Initial value: 0%(8) HP. Auth.: High pitch authority
When a rotor blades angle of attack is increased, the rotor blade becomesless reactive, in turn the helicopter might not feel as reactive at high pitch
angles. If you want to increase the reaction of the cyclic during loaded andhigh pitch maneuvers, "HP. Auth" will increase control authority and can beused to make the helicopter feel more linear under loading. Some helicopters with direct link CCPM may use this to increase stability at high collective pitch flying as well. If a helicopter feels good for normal flying, but not
the same during loaded situations, "HP. Auth" can be used to make it feel
more linear. If "HP. Auth" is set very high, the helicopter will feel more aggressive at high pitch than around neutral.
Setting ranges:  0 ~100%  Initial value: HP. Auth = 0%

188 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Rudder BasicIn the "Rudder Basic" menu, you make the basic setting of the rudder gyro.

WARNING"Rudder Basic" screen from the "BASIC MENU" screen.

The servo type parameter within the CGY mustmatch the type of servo you are using. Incorrect
settings may damage the CGY or the servo. An
incorrect setting may also result in a loss of control
during flight.

(1) Servo Type
Select the appropriate setting for the tail rotor servo.
Setting: Analog /DG:1520 /DG760
Initial setting: DG:1520
DG 1520: BLS254, BLS257, S9254, S9257
DG 760: BLS276SV, BLS251SB, BLS251, S9256, S9251(2) Gyro. Dir: Gyro direction
WARNING
Do not connect the tail rotor servo to the gyro until the
servo type has been selected. Operating the servo using theincorrect setting may damage the CGY or the servo.
Do not operate with the linkage connected until the "Srv.
Limit" function correctly sets the servo limit point. If theservo operates beyond the linkage operating range, there is adanger of either the servo or helicopter being damaged.

This parameter controls which direction the CGY (yaw axis) will compensate when the helicopter rotates. Hold the tail rotor linkage over the linkage ball on the servo, pick the helicopter up by the main shaft and rotate
the mechanics counter-clockwise. The CGY should compensate by adding
clockwise rotation pitch to the tail rotor blades. If the CGY compensates byadding counter-clockwise rotation pitch to the tail rotor blades, then it will
be necessary to reverse the Compensation Direction setting by pressingthe "Gyro Dir".
Setting value:  Normal /Reverse     Initial value: Normal(3) Work Mode: Gyro working mode
The available choices are CMT, Normal or AVCS. The CMT mode will allow
you to select either AVCS or Normal mode via the transmitter. In Normal
mode the gyro will always operate in Normal Rate Mode, and when AVCS
is selected, it will always operate in AVCS Mode.
Setting: CMT /Normal /AVCS     Initial setting: CMT(4) GY. Gain: Gyro base gain settingThis parameter sets the base gain of the gyro. This can be used to adjust
the gain % if your actual transmitter gain does not match the gain on the
CGY correctly.
Setting ranges: 0 ~150%    Initial value: 100%

(5) Srv. Limit: Limit setting

WARNING
When using the CGY for the first time, or when making mechanical changes involving throw, you must check and set the servo limits
again to prevent binding.

When the CGY is in the "Srv.Limit" parameter mode, the gyro will no longer operate and the tail servo will always center when the tail rotor stick
is released. Always exit the setup functions before attempting to fly themodel. Before each flight, always ensure that the gyros are operating andcompensating in the correct direction. The Servo Limit parameter within
the CGY is used to set the mechanical limits for the tail rotor servo. To
obtain the best performance it is recommended to set the limit in the CGY
to 100% for both directions and then adjust the servo arm length to set themechanical endpoints. After that has been completed, use the servo limit
parameter to make small adjustments that could not be made mechanically. Values between 90% and 110% are considered optimal.
[ Setting method ]Operate the rudder stick right or left in the direction you want to set. Touchthe button that is lit in green to set the limit. Do the same for the other side.

189 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Governor BasicThis menu sets the governor’s fundamental functions. The menu Servo limit point setting must be set first.
"Governor Basic" screen from the "BASIC MENU" screen.

Note: When using the governor function, be sure
to make each setting of "Governor Basic".
Note: After completing the linkage of the throttle,
be sure to set the "Servo limit point setting" first,
and then set the other functions.

(1) Governor: Governor active
Set the governor operation mode of CGY. The initial setting is "ACT (active)"
where, as the designation implies, the governor is active. If you do not want
to use governor, select "INH (Inhibit)".
Setting: ACT (Active) / INH (Inhibit)     Initial setting: ACT(2) Gear Ratio:
Input the main rotor gear ratio by pushing the "Gear Ratio" button to selectthe desired working mode.
Setting ranges:  1.00 ~ 50.00 t     Initial value: 8.00  t
Notes:• If the gear ratio is not properly set, the Engine
pinion gear
set speed and actual engine speed will
N2
be different.
• The gear ratio should be given in thehelicopter instruction manual. If thehelicopter instruction manual does notgive the gear ratio, calculate the gear
ratio as follows:

Rotor
main gear
N1

Gear ratio = N1/N2
Carry values less than 1/1000 to thenext whole number.

(3) Pole Num.: Pole number(4) Servo Type
Select the throttle servo type. Digital servos offer the best response.
Setting: Analog /DG:1520     Initial setting: Analog

WARNING
The servo type parameter within the CGY must match the type ofservo you are using. Incorrect settings may damage the CGY or the
servo. An incorrect setting may also result in the loss of control during
flight.

This parameter is used when using a direct phase sensor attachment to abrushless motor lead. Input the motor pole count as specified by the brushless motor manufacturer. When using any revolution sensor other than adirect phase sensor type, set the pole number to 2 p.
Note: For nitro use, set to 2 p.
Note: The input signal range of the CGY is 0.0 v - 3.0 v. Exceeding this voltage range may cause damage to the CGY.
Setting ranges:  2 -24 P     Initial value: 2 P(5) RPM set.: RPM setting
Setting the main rotor RPM. This is calculated by engine revolution withthe gear ratio of the main shaft.
When the rotation speed can be set with the governor mixing function of
the transmitter, it is necessary to first match the display rpm value of 1-2-3
of "RPM Set" with the display rpm value of the transmitter.
Setting ranges:  off /700 ~ 4,000 rpm     Initial value: 1,000  rpm
*To set lower than 1,000 rpm, set "Low. Revo" of "Governor Expert" menu to 700  
rpm.

190 →

GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Governor Basic(6) Stick sw.: Stick switch
The governor can be activated by throttle stick position.
[Setting method] Touch the "Stick SW" button to enter the setting mode.
Operate the throttle stick to the position where you want to turn Governor
ON. Touch the “Stick SW” button again. “Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch
the [Yes] button, the ON position is memorized. This stick switch function isalways enabled when the next "ON / OFF sw" is "INH" or the "Governor ON /OFF switch is not set by S.BUS setting.
When governor is turned on and off by transmitter throttle stick
The data is set so that the governor can beturned on and off with the transmitter throttle
stick position. The following describes this operation.

(Governor operating point)
Set speed• Throttle stick over set point and more than 60%
of set rotation speed.
ON

The stick is at, or beyond the set point andis 60% of the rotation
100% speed value of the governor.

*This is the setting value of "Gov. On. Revo: Governor ON revolution setting".
• Throttle stick held at the set point or more Remains.
ON(8) BAT F/S: Battery fail safe
When the receiver battery voltage becomes equal to or less than "BFS.
Volt" set in the "Governor Expert" menu, the battery fail safe function is activated, the governor function is turned OFF, and the throttle servo moves
to the set position.
When Battery Fail Safe is enabled, items for setting the throttle servo position are displayed. The setting method is the same as "Stick sw", so pleaserefer to this section of the manual for information on setting this function.
If the battery voltage is lower than the set voltage of the "Battery F/
S" for about 3 seconds, the Gx (gyro) LED of the CGY solid red light.
When "Battery F/S" is set to "ACT" in "GOV BASIC", the servo is fixed
to the throttle position set by "Battery F/S". When the throttle stick is
set to the slowest position, the "Battery F/S" function is temporarily
canceled. However, after 30 seconds, the "Battery F/S" function is
activated again and the servo is locked. When the "Battery F/S" operates, quickly landing and stopping the helicopter, please charge thebattery.

WARNING
When using the CGY for the first time, or when making changes inthe throw of a servo and its linkage, always perform the limit setting
operation.

• Throttle stick position is below the set point selected.
OFF

Set point or less0%(OFF at slow side)

When idle up• When the throttle curve is set at idle up, and when the throttle output is over the set
value (initial value: 30%), the governor will always and remain ON even if the stick islowered to the bottom.

(7) ON/OFF sw.: Governor on/off switch
This parameter allows the user to turn the governor on or off via a switch
on the transmitter. Choose INH if you do not want to use it.
When turning on /off governor with switch
Select the ON / OFF switch channel with "GOV sw channel" on "SBUS BASIC"
menu.
Setting the switch to the ON position turns on, or enables thegovernor. The following describes this operation.
• Switch set to on position and engine running at 60% or moreof set speedON• Throttle stick set to maximum slow position• Switch set to off position

ON

Governor can be turnedon and off by a switch.

OFF

When you activate the switch, the direction setting of the switch is displayed.
Select the switch ON / OFF direction (Normal / Reverse).

WARNING
When using the CGY for the first time, or when making changes inthe throw of a servo and its linkage, always perform the limit setting
operation.

(9) Lim. set: Servo limit point setting
Servo limit point setting defines the overall travel range for the throttle servo. It is fundamental for governor operation and must be set prior to otherfunctions. Servo limits must also be reset when the throttle linkage or trim
are changed.
How to set the servo limit point:
Touch the “Lim.Set Id” button to enter the setting mode. Set the transmitter’s
throttle stick to the idle position. Touch the “Lim.Set Id” button again. The
limit of idle will be saved to the CGY. The cursor will move to "Lim. Set Hi".
Set the stick to the full high position. Touch the “Lim.Set Hi” button again.
The limit of high will be saved to the CGY. If the setting data is not normal(servo operation amount is 50% or less), "Err" is displayed. In this case,check the transmitter setting and repeat this procedure once again.

(10) Limit Test: Check the set limit point
Check the set limit point. Press "Idle" or "High" to move the servo to each
limit point. Press “End” to end the test.

191 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Governor Basic(11) SenseTyp: Sensor type
Select the type of governor sensor.
Nitro (BPS-1 backplate; Magnet Type)
1:1 Magnet "1:1 Magn" (Magnet type applied to helicopter part that turns at
the same RPM as the main rotor)
HPoleEP: For Electric motors 8 poles and above
LPoleEP: For electric motors 6 poles.

(12) GOV Gain: Governor gain

Cond

Governor Gain. If the value of the Governor Gain is set too low, the helicopter's RPM will fluctuate with collective and cyclic pitch changes. Conversely, if the number is too high, the RPM itself will fluctuate and surge
during flight.
Setting ranges:  1 ~100%     Initial value: Nitro = 40%, 1:1Magn = 60%, HPoleEP= 30%, LPoleEP = 10%(13) L Lmt. L rpm / H rpm: Low limit RPM

Cond

Low RPM Limit sets the minimum amount of throttle that the governor willcommand during an over-speed situation. Too low of value the engine
could shut off or not recover power quickly enough during the next collective movement. If the value is set too high, the governor will not control
overspeed when the rotor head is unloaded.
Use:
L Lmt. L rpm: For RPMS of 700-1700
L Lmt. H rpm For RPMS of 1701-4000
Setting ranges:  L Lmt. L rpm = 0 ~80%,  L Lmt. H rpm = 10 ~80%
Initial value:        L Lmt. L rpm = 25%,  L Lmt. H rpm = 45%  

(14) SBUS2 rpm out: RPM display on transmitter
When displaying the rpm with the telemetry function, set it to ACT.
Setting: ACT (Active) / INH (Inhibit)     Initial setting: INH(15) SBUS2 rpm Slot: RPM display on transmitter
Set the slot number of the telemetry rotation sensor registered on thetransmitter side.
This must be set so that no slots overlap one another.

(16) Rev. Sensor: Revolution sensor testingThis menu is utilized to ensure that the revolution sensor is functioning properly.
In order to test the sensor, do NOT start the engine. Instead, we recommend turning the engine over by hand or the utilization of a starter. To prevent inadvertent
ignition of the engine, do NOT use a glow plug igniter when turning the engine over.
The numerical values on the left side of the display are the current value. The right side of the display indicates the maximum sensor value. The output level needs
to be more than 60% for correct governor operation. Also, when using the backplate sensor, the signal level of the backplate sensor varies depending on the rotation speed (3,000 rpm or more is the detectable rotation speed).
By the telemetry function, the number of revolutions read by the governor sensor can be displayed on the monitor of the transmitter. In order to be able to display, activate the telemetryrotation sensor (SBS-01RM) on the transmitter and set the gear ratio to 1.00.
Note: It can not be used when the transmitter is FASSTest 12 CH system.

192 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Expert Menu
This menu enables the user to further refine the gyro and governor settings.
Expert Menu

◆ Swash Detail（Swash）◆ Flight Tune Expert（Aileron・Elevator）◆ Rudder Expert（Rudder）◆ Governor Expert（Governor）

193 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Rudder Expert
The rudder Expert menu allows for further refinement of the tail rotor gyro performance. "Rudder Expert" screen from the "EXPERT MENU
3D" screen.

(1) RUD Ntr: Rudder servo neutral settingThis parameter is used to set the neutral position of the rudder servo. Position the rudder servo arm as perpendicular as possible to the tail rotor
pushrod prior to making adjustments with this parameter.
Setting ranges:  -240 ~0 ~+240     Initial value: +0(2) EXP. AVCS / EXP. NORM: Rudder exponential
This parameter sets the feel of the tail rotor control around center. Whenset to [0] the control curve is linear. Using a [+] value the tail rotor will be
more sensitive around neutral conversely, using a [-] value will soften the
feeling around neutral. The RUD EXP parameter in your transmitter canalso be used to tune the tail rotor to a desired feeling.
Setting ranges:  -100 ~0 ~+100%     Initial value: AVCS = -20%, NORM = -20%
Sports = AVCS -60% / NORMAL -40%,  3D = AVCS -20% / NORMAL -20%>

194 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Rudder Expert(3) CNT. DlIn: Control delay inThis parameter sets the delay as you move the stick from neutral towardleft or right. Larger values result in a softer tail rotor feel off center. Thisparameter must be adjusted individually for LEFT and RIGHT tail rotor
commands. Follow these same procedures to adjust the tail rotor feel in the
opposite direction.
[ Setting method ]Move the transmitter Rudder stick right or left in the direction you want to
set. Touch the green button to enter the setting mode and set the delay
amount. Do the same for the other side.
Setting ranges:  0 ~ 20 n     Initial value:  15 n(4) CNT. DlOut: Control delay out
This parameter sets the delay when the stick is returned back to the neutral position. This parameter is useful to tune how aggressively the tailrotor stops following a pirouette. The higher the value, the softer the stop.
This parameter must be adjusted individually for LEFT and RIGHT tail rotor
commands. The setting method is the same as "CNT. DlIn", so please referto the information above.
Setting ranges:  0 ~ 20 n     Initial value:  12 n(5) ANG: Pirouette speed
This parameter adjusts the maximum pirouette speed of the tail rotor thatthe gyro will allow at 100% dual rate.
Setting ranges:  100 ~999 d     Initial value: = 720 d,

195 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Rudder Expert(6) F/F.Rate U / F/F.Rate D: F/F mixing rate
Feed Forward mix is used to counteract sudden increases in torque from the
motor during fast collective pitch changes. If you notice a tail kick, using (rightrudder on Clockwise rotor disk, left rudder on CCW) F/F mixing can be tuned
to reduce the tail kick. The mixing amount can be individually set for high pitch
side (U) and low pitch (D) side with zero pitch as the center.
Setting ranges:  -100 ~0~+100%     Initial value: +0%(7) ACC Gain: F/F mixing acceleration gain
In low head speed situations where a lot of F/F Mixing might be needed,
acc. gain boosts the input and removes it immediately after to help cure thesudden change in torque, but it does not allow the large tail rotor input toalter the axial behavior of the helicopter.
Setting ranges:  0 ~200%     Initial value: 0%(8) Tail Resp: Tail response(9) RESET : Rudder gyro data reset

The goal is to match the response between the helicopter tail response and the
gyro control. This feature is utilized to do so. 1 is the fastest response. Generally, if the tail response is slow or the servo's speed is slow, setting the tailresponse setting late will increase the gyro sensitivity and improve the control
performance. Also, if the response setting is delayed, the power consumption of
the servo will be reduced. However, if the response setting is too late, the operation cannot keep up with high-speed operation of the helicopter.

This resets the "Rudder Expert" setting back to the defaults.

Setting ranges:  1 ~5     Initial value: 1

196 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Flight Tune Expert（Aileron/Elevator Gyro Expert Setting）
The "Flight Tune Expert" menus allow further refinement of cyclic gyro performance. "Flight Tune Expert" screen
from the "EXPERT MENU 3D" screen.
(1) HeadHld A / HeadHld E: Head hold aileron / elevator

Cond

This features is used to adjust the heading hold aspect of the gyro control.
If the helicopter is not holding angle or cyclic control rates, increasing theheading hold gain will improve holding the helicopter at a certain angle andimprove the cyclic rate consistency. If this is set too high you could see an
oscillation on that axis. Lowering the heading hold below default would be
used if the transmitter gain is reduced and a consistent oscillation is still
not fixed during flight.
Setting ranges:  0 ~200%     Initial value: 80%(2) StopTune A : Stop tune aileron

Cond

Cyclic stop tuning on the aileron axis. If the helicopter continues to coast
after an after an ail roll, lowering "StpTune A" will create a harder stop action
to remove the coasting. If the helicopter bounces on the aileron axis after anaileron control input, increasing "StpTune A" will reduce this bounce.
Setting ranges:  0 ~250%     Initial value: 80%(3) StopTune E: Stop tune elevator

Cond

Cyclic stop tuning on the elevator axis. If the helicopter, after an elevator
flip, continues to coast, lowering "StopTune E" will create a harder stop
action to remove the coasting. If the helicopter continues to coast after anelevator flip, lowering the "Stop tune E" will reduce this bounce.
Setting ranges:  0 ~250%     Initial value: 80%(4) HeadResp: Head Response

Cond

Head Response matches the gyro control speed to that which the helicopter is capable of reacting. In a standard helicopter a Head Responseof 1 should always be used, but on some scale applications, or uniquely
designed rotor heads, increasing head response might be needed to cureover correction of the gyro.
Setting ranges:  1 ~10     Initial value: 1(5) DeadBand: Dead band
Transmitter control dead band. If you are noticing inconsistent swash platedrift or poor initialization it could be poor transmitter potentiometer resolution. If you have to increase this value beyond 10.0, it is best to checkcalibration on your transmitter.
Setting ranges:  0 ~25     Initial value: 4.0(6) RESET : FLT tune data reset
This resets the "FLT.Tun" setting back to the defaults.

197 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Swash Detail
The swash detail setting is used to keep the swash plate level at high and low collective pitch to cyclic interactions and cyclic
pitch to collective pitch interactions. "Swash Detail" screen from the "EXPERT MENU 3D" screen.
(1) PIT

AIL: collective pitch

aileron mixing rate

Going from MID to HIGH and MID to LOW collective pitch check that theswash plate is traveling flat throughout the entire range.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Setting ranges:  30 ~150%     Initial value: 100%(2) PIT

ELE: collective pitch

elevator mixing rate

Going from MID to HIGH and MID to LOW collective pitch check that theswash plate is traveling flat throughout the entire range.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Setting ranges:  30 ~150%     Initial value: 100%(3) PIT

ELE2: collective pitch

2nd elevator mixing rate

This parameter adjusts the pitch to 2nd elevator mixing rate. The rates canboth be adjusted individually for both full high and low collective positions.
Note: This setting is only available if the H4-xx swash mode has been
selected.
Setting ranges:  30 ~150%     Initial value: 100%

(4) AIL

PIT: aileron

collective pitch mixing rate

At the middle collective pitch, check that during right to left and left to rightaileron action the swash plate is staying level on both the elevator and collective pitch axis. If the swash plate is rising or falling with aileron inputs.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Setting ranges:  30 ~150%     Initial value: 100%(5) AIL

ELE: aileronelevator mixing rate

This parameter adjusts the aileron to elevator mixing rate. The rate can be
adjusted for left and right directions individually. Note: This setting is only
available if the H4-45 swash mode has been selected.
Setting ranges:  30 ~150%     Initial value: 100%(6) AIL

ELE2: aileron

2nd elevator mixing rate

This parameter adjusts the aileron to 2nd elevator mixing rate. The rate
can be adjusted for left and right directions individually. Note: This setting
is only available if the H4-45 swash mode has been selected.
Setting ranges:  30 ~150%     Initial value: 100%

198 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Swash Detail(7) ELE

PIT: elevator

collective pitch mixing rate

During back and forward elevator inputs at middle collective, check if theswash plate is raising or lowering during the input.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: This setting can not be used when H4-00 swash mode is selected.
Setting ranges:  30 ~150%    Initial value: H3-120 = 50%, except H3-120 = 100%(8) ELE

AIL: elevator

aileron mixing rate

While moving the elevator back and forth at middle collective, check tomake sure the aileron axis is staying level.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: This setting can not be used when H4-00 swash mode is selected.
Setting ranges:  30 ~150%    Initial value: H3-120 = 50%, except H3-120 = 100%(9) ELE

ELE2: elevator

2nd elevator mixing rate

This parameter adjusts the elevator to 2nd elevator mixing rate. The rate
can be adjusted separately for up and down directions individually.
Note: This setting is only available if the H4-xx swash mode has been
selected.
Setting ranges:  30 ~150%     Initial value: 100%

(10) AIL High / AIL Low: Linkage compensation aileron
At HIGH pitch and LOW pitch check to make sure that the swash plate isstaying level on the elevator and collective axis when using aileron inputs.
If the swash plate is rising or falling:[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: check all four directions: high/right; high/left; low/right; low/left
Setting ranges:  0 ~100%    Initial value: 0%(11) AIL Dir: Compensation direction of the aileron
If the above Data (+/-) correction from 0-100 is NOT in the correct compensation direction, change the value from [+] or [-].
Setting:  +/-     Initial setting: +199 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Swash Detail(12) ELE High / ELE Low: Linkage compensation elevator
At both the HIGH pitch and LOW pitch check to make sure that the swash
plate is staying level on the aileron and collective axis when using elevator
inputs. If the swash plate is rising or falling:[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: check all four directions: high/back; high/forward; low/back; low/forward.
Setting ranges:  0 ~ 100%    Initial value: 0%(13) ELE Dir: Compensation direction of the elevator
If the above Data (+/-) correction from 0-100 is NOT in the correct compensation direction, change the value from [+] or [-].
Setting:  +/-     Initial setting: +(14) Speed Comp: Speed compensation
In 120 degrees CCPM all servos do not travel the same distance on elevator input. Having previously set the ELE-PIT and ELE-AIL parameters, if
during rapid movement of the elevator axis the swash plate is not staying
level, use the "Speed Comp" button to match all servo speeds. Note: a (+will slow the Aileron/Pitch Servo – will reduce speed comp on Aileron/Pitch
Servo).
Setting ranges:  0 ~100%    Initial value: H3-120 = 50%, except H3-120 = 0%(15) SWASH Rot: Swash rotation
Using the "SWASH Rot" button, electronically add rotor head phasing to
the swash plate controls. If possible, it is recommended to use mechanicalphasing adjustment, but if the rotor head does not allow this and you feelthat the model is NOT flying axially on each control input, this parametercan be used to adjust the pure reaction of each axis in flight. (Typically advanced phasing on clockwise rotor disk and a slight clockwise increase inswash plate alignment vs rotor axle are needed to create an axial reaction.
The opposite is true for a counterclockwise rotor disk model.)Setting ranges:  -90  deg ~+90  deg    Initial value:  +0  deg(16) RESET : Swash detail data reset
This resets the "Swash Detail" setting back to the defaults.

200 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Governor Expert
This menu sets the Governor Expert parameters, allowing the user to further refine the governor settings.
"Governor Expert" screen from the "EXPERT MENU 3D" screen.
(1) Work Mode: Governor working mode
Sets the governing type mode.
- GOVERNOR (Governor Mode) – RPM is entirely controlled by the GOV
once it has engaged. The GOV will do whatever it takes to hold a constant
RPM throughout flight.
- Rev. Lmt (Limiter Mode) – Throttle control follows the throttle curves toadvance the throttle position during flight, but controls the RPM during
throttle reduction by not letting the RPM overspeed past the set RPM.
When the Rev.Lmt mode is selected, the menu (5) "THR. Mode" should be
set to Tx.Curve mode.
Setting:  GOVERNOR /Rev. Lmt     Initial setting: GOVERNOR(2) Revo Disp: Governor working modeThis enables the user to display either the desired rotor RPM or the Engine
RPM accordingly.
Setting:  Rotor /Engine     Initial setting: Rotor(3) F/F. Cyclic: Feed Forward from Cyclic
Increasing the value will add throttle with cyclic commands to aid in RPM
stability.
Setting ranges:  0 ~100%    Initial value: 0%(4) Yaw. Comp: Governor working mode
Yaw compensation allows the governor to more rapidly correct for changes
in power demands of the model resulting from yaw input. Set the mode tomatch the gyro installation direction. Select from: CW/TOP, CW/BOTM,
CCW/TOP, CCW/BOTM.
Note: if the user has selected the governor only mode, this parameter isinhibited.
Revolution fluctuation in the case of pirouettes
The governor detects the rpm via the revolution sensor mounted in theengine section. During a pirouettes, the helicopter itself rotates, so that its
pirouettes speed is added (reduced) to the engine speed. Therefore, themain rotor speed will fluctuate accordingly. Since the CGY has a gyro, it canaccurately measure the pirouette speed. The yaw rate correction is thus
determined by a combination of gyro function and governor function.
CW: clockwise rotor direction
CCW: counter clockwise rotor direction
TOP: Gyro top/name emblem facing up
BOTM: Gyro top/name emblem facing down
Setting:  CW/TOP, CW/BOTM, CCW/TOP, CCW/BOTM     Initial setting: CW/TOP(5) THR. Mode: Throttle data modeThis parameter selects the throttle input operation.
Optimize:
CGY sets the throttle input signal to optimum. There is no need to consider
the throttle curve setting on the transmitter.
Fixed:
This is the suggested mode for use with electric motors. This setting ensuresthat there is a fixed throttle input as is related to the helicopter revolution.
Tx.Curve:
If this mode is selected, the CGY uses the exact throttle input from the transmitter. As such, the throttle curve setting on the transmitter is required.
Note: when the Rev.Lmt mode is selected, this mode should also be selected.
Setting:  GOVERNOR /Rev. Lmt     Initial setting: GOVERNOR

201 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Governor Expert(6) Revo. Up Dly: Revolution change up delay
How quickly the RPM changes when increasing RPM between two different
RPM conditions and flight modes. A higher number slows the RPM change
rate; a lower value speeds up the RPM change rate.
Setting ranges:  2 ~40 Frm     Initial value: 8 Frm(7) Revo. Dn Dly: Revolution change down delay
How quickly the RPM changes when reducing RPM between two different
RPM conditions and flight modes. A higher number slows the RPM change
rate; a lower value speeds up the RPM change rate.
Setting ranges:  2 ~40 Frm     Initial value: 10 Frm(8) Start Dly: Start delay
How quickly the RPM stabilizes to the set RPM from when the GOV isturned ON. A higher value slows down the spool up rate; a lower value
speeds up the spool up rate.
Setting ranges:  2 ~20 Frm     Initial value: 5 Frm(9) Gov. On. Revo: Governor ON revolution settingThis parameter tells the governor at what percentage of the set rpm it is tobecome active. The default value is 60%. In this case, the governor will not
engage until the engine rpm reaches 60% of the set rpm. If you feel thatthe time for governor engagement is too slow, decrease the value to 50 ~55%. The starting time will be faster.
Setting ranges:  50 ~90%     Initial value: 60%(10) BFS. Volt: Battery F/S voltage settingThis parameter sets the battery fail safe and low battery alarm voltage
levels, or thresholds. Set the proper voltage as determined by the battery type. The battery characteristics are different depending on cell type/chemistry.
Suggested setting voltages are as follows.
• 4 cells NiCd or NiMH (Normal: 4.8 v) = 3.8 v• 2 cells LiFe (Normal: 6.6 v) = 6.0 ~6.2 v• 2 cells LiPo (Normal: 7.4 v) = 7.2 ~7.4 v(11) Low. Revo: Low revolution settingThis value is set to assign the lowest possible governing RPM. If the RPM isbelow, or can not reach this RPM, the governor will not engage. Select between either 1,000 rpm or 700 rpm. It corresponds also to a helicopter with arotor speed of 1,000 rpm or less, such as a large gas machine.
Setting:  700 /1,000 rpm     Initial setting: 1000 rpm(12) RESET : Governor expert data reset
This resets the "Governor Expert" setting back to the defaults.

202 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

MODEL MENU (Multicopter functions)
The dedicated mixes, etc. usable when
multicopter model type is selected are displayedin this Model menu functions section.

These dedicated mixes can be set for eachflight condition, as required. When you want to
use the system by switching the settings for eachcondition by switch or stick position, use theCondition select function to add flight conditions.
(Up to 8 conditions can be used)

Model menu (Multicopter) functions table
Servo monitor

Displays the servo test and operation position

Condition selectFlight conditions addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming, and condition delay can be set.

AFR

Sets the angle and curve of all the operation functions.

Dual rate

D/R curve which can be switched with a switch, etc. can also be added.

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10 mixes can be used for each condition.

Gyro

Used to switch gyro sensitivity

203 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Condition selectFlight condition's addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming,and condition delay can be set. [All model types]

The functions in the Model menu can be used byswitching the settings of up to 8 flight conditions
by using the Condition select function to add flight
conditions. Add conditions, as required.
When you do not want to use the Condition selectfunction, this setting is unnecessary. In this case,use the flight conditions assigned at initial setting.
● Since switching by stick and lever position, in
addition to ordinary toggle switch, is possible
as the flight condition selector switch, thisfunction can be linked with other operations.
● A Condition Delay function can be set.
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated
when there are sudden changes in the servo

positions and when there are variations in
the operating time between channels duringcondition switching can be suppressed. The
delay can be set for each channel.
When setting the delay function at theswitching destination condition, therelated function changes after a delay
corresponding to the set amount.
● When multiple conditions were set, theiroperation priority can be freely changed.
● The condition name can be changed. The
selected condition name is displayed on
the screen. When a condition has been
added, give it a name which can be easily
confirmed.

● Select [Condition select] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name

Conditions List

Condition Renaming

Condition Addition

1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to rename in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Rename] button.
3. Enter the new name from the
keyboard which appears on
the screen.
4. When the keyboard [Condition
name] key is tapped, the newname is registered.

1. When the [Add] button is tapped, theCondition Select screen appears.
*Only the number of buttons corresponding to theconditions which can be added are displayed.
2. Select the desired conditions by tapping
the buttons.
*The selected conditions are added to Conditions
List.
3. Tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen.
4. Select the switch to be used in condition
switching.
(See "Switch selection method" at the endof this manual for selection method
details.)
5. The "Condition1" data for the added
conditions is copied.

204 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Currently selected condition name

The ON/OFF switch ofcondition is chosen.

Conditions List

Condition Copy

Condition Remove

1. Tap the [Copy] button. The Copy screen
appears.
2. Select the condition by tapping the buttonof the copy source conditions.
3. Next, select the condition by tapping the
copy destination condition.
4. Tap the [Copy] button.
5. When the [Yes] button is tapped, the datais copied. (To abort copying, tap the [No]button.)1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to reset in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Remove] button.
3. When the [Yes] button istapped, the condition isreset. (To abort resetting, tap
the [No] button.)● Group/single mode switching (Gr./Sngl)(For a description of the operation
method, see the description at theback of this manual.)

Last condition has
the highest priority

Priority change
1. Tap the condition whose
priority you want to change
in Conditions List.
2. Change the priority with thepriority [ ] or [ ] button. (Thelast condition has the highest
priority.)*The initial setting condition
cannot be moved. It has thelowest priority.

Condition delay setting
1. Switch to the condition you want to set.
2. Tap the Delay button of the channel you
want to set.
3. Use the value input buttons to set the delay.
●Initial value: 0●Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)

205 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

AFR

The angle and curve of each operation function can be set. [All model types]

AFR function is used to adjust the throw andoperation curve of the stick, lever, and switch
functions for each flight condition.

This is normally used after End Point has defined
the maximum throw. When mixing is applied fromone channel to another channel, both channels
can be adjusted at the same time by adjusting theoperation rate through the AFR function.
● Operation curve adjustment: Three typesof curves (EXP1, EXP2, and Point) can beselected. A maximum 17 points curve can beused for the point curve type. (Initial setting:
9 points) The number of points can also be
increased and decreased and curves fromcomplex curves to simple curves can beused.
● Operation speed adjustment: The operation
speed of each function when the function
is operated (including at flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The function
operates smoothly at a constant speed
corresponding to the set speed.

When D/R is turned ON, the display willshow "D/R----", and the rudder angle (rate)and EXP can be set when D/R is ON.

● Select [AFR] at the model menu and callthe setup screen shown below.
Curve select
EXP1, EXP2, Point curve●Return to Model menu

Curve selectSeparately ⇔ Combination(Left and rightsymmetricalcurve.)
Left/right, Up/down, overall
adjustment at Rate A andRate B● Operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Function selection
1. When the function select button is tapped, a selection screen appears.
2. Select the function you want to set at the selection screen.

● Group/single mode switch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)● Servo speed setting(For a description of the setting
method, see the description at
the back of this manual.)

206 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Dual rate
D/R curves which can be switched by switch, etc.
can be added. The curve can be adjusted by the
AFR function.
● Up to 6 rates can be added for eachcondition.
● D/R is set for each condition and is notreflected at other conditions.
● D/R at the top of the D/R list has priority.

● Select [Dual rate] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu

The ON/OFF switch ofdual rate is chosen.

Activate the D/R function
by tapping the [INH] .

Rate, EXP settings
are on AFR function

When the function select button
is tapped, a selection screen
appears.
Select the function you want to
set at the selection screen.

● Setting rudder angle, EXP
On this D/R screen you can set functions andswitchover switches. Rudder angle (rate) and EXP
settings are performed on the AFR screen when
the D/R switch is ON.

207 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10
mixings can be used for each condition. [All model types]

Programmable mixing may be used to correctundesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also
be used for unusual control configurations. Mixing
means that the motion of a command channel,
called the "master," is added to the motion of themixed channel, called "slave."
You may choose to have the Masters trim added to
the Slave channel response, if you desire ("Trim"setting). The mixing curve can be changed sothat the undesired tendencies can be corrected
effectively by setting the EXP1/EXP2/Point modes.

Offset-type mixing applies a fixed offset or presetto the programmed channel servo operation andmay control up to four circuits simultaneously.
The Programmable mixing includes a powerful linkfunction, which allows Programmable mixing to belinked with the special mixing functions, or withother programmable mixing functions. The linkfunction can be set up for Master and Slave channel
individually.

● Tap the [Prog. mixes] button in the Model menu to callthe setup screen shown below.
●Return to Model menu
● Group/single modeswitch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information,
see the description
at the back of thismanual.)After this function is
activated, the masterand slave function
names (or offset mixing)
are displayed.

Mixing/Offset modeswitch● Operation curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the back ofthis manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH] .

Trim mode setting ON/OFF.

The ON/OFF switch ofprog. mixes is chosen.

Fine tuning trim
setting

Master function(or Stick, Switch, Dial)
is chosen.

The on time (start/stoptime) can be set up to 4
seconds. It is useful for
landing gear control of thejet or scale plane, etc.

Slave function is chosen.
Servo speed setting

208 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Setting methods●Group/single mode selection
Activating functions for only the selectedconditions:
1. Tap the [Gr] button and switch to the [Sngl ]mode.

*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the Gr
and Sngl modes.

●Mixing mode selection
Using the offset mode:
1. Tap the Mode button and switch to theOffset mode.

1. To turn the trim mode ON/OFF, tap the Trim
button on the screen.

*When mixing includes master side trim, set the Trim button
to [ON]. When mixing does not include master side trim, set
the Trim button to [OFF].
*Each time this button is pressed, it toggles between [ON]and [OFF].
*This is effective when the master channel is set by Function.

●Mixing curve type selection
1. Tap the curve type selection button of thecurve type you want to use to display theselection screen. Then, select the curve youwant to use.

*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between the
Mixing and Offset modes.

*For a description of the curve setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.

●Mixing setup screen selection
1. Tap the button of the mixing you want to
set. The mixing setup screen is displayed.
Activate the function.
2. Activate the function by tapping the [INH]button.

●Fine tuning trim setting
1. When using the curve fine tuning function,
tap the [--] button of the Fine Tuning item tocall the <Switch> screen and then select thelever, VR, etc. you want to use.

*Each time this button is tapped, it toggles between [INH]and [ON/OFF].

●Mixing ON/OFF switch setting and ON/OFF
direction switching*An ON/OFF switch is not set even when the function is
activated.

1. When you want to turn mixing ON/OFF byswitch, tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen and then select the switch and its ON
direction.
*For a description of the selection method, see [Switch
setting method] at the back of this manual.

*For a description of the fine tuning trim setting method, see
the description at the back of this manual.

●Servo speed setting
1. When setting the servo speed, tap the speed
button. The Servo speed setup screen isdisplayed.
*For a description of the servo speed setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.
*Offset mixing changes the speed. Use the Speed In andSpeed Out buttons to readjust the speed.
The mixing switch can set a delay with a different rate atstarting and stopping.
*This function is inactive when a mixing switch is not set.

●Master channel setting (except offset typemixing)1. Tap the Master button to call the Function
menu and select the master channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
*Each time the button is tapped, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).
*Master channel control can be set to stick, VR, and othersimple travels which do not include End point, AFR, D/R,
mixing setting, etc. In this case, display the <Function,H/
W> screen by tapping the [Stick, Switch, Dial] button andthen select master channel side control.

●Slave channel setting
1. Tap the Slave button to call the Function
menu and select the slave channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
*Each time the button is pressed, it toggles between mixing
direction + and - and "OFF" (no link).

●Trim mode ON/OFF setting

209 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Gyro
This function is used when a Futaba GY Series
gyro is used to stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The
sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/GYmode) can be switched with a switch.
● Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can beswitched.
● Up to 3 axes (Gyro/Gyro 2/Gyro 3) can be
simultaneously controlled.

*Initial setting does not assign a sensitivity channel. Use theFunction menu of the Linkage menu to assign the sensitivity
channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) used to a vacant channel
beforehand.
Set [Control] and [Trim] other than Function to [--].

● Select [Gyro] at the model menu andcall the setup screen shown below.
Tapping this will change INH to either ON or OFF
and enable operation. Adjustment of the threerates (sensitivity) and switching between Normaland AVCS is possible.

●Return to Model menu

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
gyro is chosen.

The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) andsensitivity of the 3axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.

3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment● Three rates (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3) can be used.
Tap to the [Rate] item. Adjust the rate.
● When using this function, Tap [INH].
● When a Futaba GY gyro is used, when [GY] type is selected, thesensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS and Normal modes.
● When setting a switch, tap the Switch item and tap the "--" button to callthe selection screen, and then select the switch and set its ON direction.
(For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at
the end of this manual.)

210 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Common operations used in function setup screen
This section describes the functions often used at the function setup screen. Refer to it when setting
each function.

Operations value setting
Tapping the value setting buttons on each screen will cause value input
buttons to appear at the top of the panel.
Value input buttons display
at the top of the panel
Pressing and holding
a value will return it
to its default setting.
Large change
in value

Small change
in value

Large change
in value

Operations related to flight conditions
Group/single mode switching (Gr/Singl)

Condition delay setting

When setting multiple flight conditions,linking the setting contents with all conditions(group mode) or setting independently (singlemode) can be selected. The mode can bechanged at the [Gr] item on each setup screen.

Unnecessary fuselage motion generated when
there are sudden changes in the servo positionand variations in the operating time between
channels can be suppressed by using thecondition delay function of the condition selectfunction [Condition select].
When the delay function is set at theswitching destination condition, a delay
corresponding to that amount is applied and therelated functions change smoothly.

[Group/single mode switching][Setting method]
Tap

Tap

Tap
●Group mode (Gr)The same setting contents are set to all
the flight conditions.
●Single mode (Singl)
Set this mode when the setting contents
are not linked with other conditions.

1. Switch to the condition you want to set
and tap the delay[ 0 (value)].
2. Set the delay using the " ▼▼ " " ▼ " " ▲ ""▲▲" buttons
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)(When the value is tapped, the delay is reset to the initialvalue.)

211 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTSOperations related to fine tuning VR
Operation mode selection*The operation modes which can beselected depend on the function.

VR selection

Rate adjustment[Setting method]
1. Control selection
Tap the [Control] "--" button to call the<Hardware select> screen, and then selectthe switch and its ON direction.
2. Mode selection
Tap the [Mode] button, and then select themode ([LIN.], [ATL+], [ATL-], or [SYM.]).
3. Rate adjustment
Tap the [Rate] "value" button.
Set the rate using the " ▼ ▼ " " ▼ " " ▲ ""▲▲" buttons(Fine tuning VR operation position)[Fine tuning VR operation mode][LIN.] M i x i n g r a t e 0 % a t c e n t e r o f V R .
When the VR is turned clockwise andcounterclockwise, the mixing rateincreases and decreases, respectively.
[ATL+] Mixing rate 0% at left end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[ATL-] Mixing rate 0% at right end of VR.
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[SYM.] When the VR is turned to the left or
right of the neutral position, the mixing
rate increases.

Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initialvalue.)

LIN.

ATL+ ATL-

SYM.

After setting, press a HOME/EXIT button

212 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTSOperations related to servo speed

Linear（First）
0 ～ 27（Slowly）

Servo speed setting
The servo speed at each function
operation (including flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The servos
operate smoothly at a fixed speed
corresponding to the set speed. The
operating speed (In side) and return speed(Out side) can be set individually.
Switch the operation mode according to
the set function.
"Symmetry" mode: Used with ailerons
and other self neutral functions.
"Linear" mode: Used with functions
which hold the operation position of
the throttle and switch channel, etc.
[Setting method]
1. Select the mode ([Linear] or[Symmetry]). Each time the button istapped, it toggles between [Linear]and [Symmetry].

In case of Linear

In
Speed

In speed

Out
Speed

Out speed

Symmetry
In
Speed

In
Speed

Out
Speed

Out
Speed
In case of Symmetry
In speed

2. Tap the In or Out Speed button andset the servo speed.
Initial value: 0

Out speed

Setting range: 0~27

213 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Curve setting operation

This section describes the setting procedure of curves which are used with the AFR function and eachmixing function.
Curve type selection
Four types of curves (EXP1, EXP2, Point andSpline) can be selected.

Curve type selection
1. Tap the button of the curve type youwant to use.
*The curve type changes and the display
returns to the original screen.
[EXP1]: EXP1 curve[EXP2]: EXP2 curve[Point]: point curve[Spline]: spline curve

214 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Setting by curve type
When the curve type is selected as described above, adjustment items corresponding to the curve typeappear on the screen. Adjust each curve as described below.
EXP1/EXP2 curve adjustment(EXP1 curve)

1. Tap to the [Offset] setting item.
2. Move the curve in the vertical direction
using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲" buttons
Initial value: +0.0%(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initialvalue.)

Using the EXP1 curve is effective in smoothing
starting of the ailerons, elevator, rudder, etc.
(EXP2 curve)*[Separ.] mode: Normal setting*[Comb.] mode: Creates a left and rightsymmetrical curve.

Using the EXP2 curve is effective in engine riseand other engine control.
The curve left and right rates ([Rate A], [RateB]) and EXP curve rate ([EXP A], [EXP B]) canbe adjusted individually. ([EXP] for EXP2)
The curve can also be offset horizontally([Offset]) in the vertical direction.
[Rate setting]
1. Tap to the [Rate A], [Rate B], [EXP A], or [EXP
B] setting item.
2. Set the rate using the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲"
buttons
Initial value: +100.0% (rate)/+0.0% (EXP rate)*Initial value differs depending on function.

Adjustment range: -200.0~+200.0% (rate)/100.0~+100.0% (EXP rate)(When the value is tapped, the rate is reset to the initialvalue.)[Offsetting the curve horizontally in thevertical direction]

215 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Point curves or spline curves of up to 11/17 points
can be used. (Initial value: 7/9 points) The set
points can be freely increased, decreased, andoffset.
Point addition method
1.Open the screen of a mixing curve with thecurve function.

5. Press "Rate" and use the up/down arrows toadjust the rate points up or down.

The kind of mixing curve

Point deletion method
1. Use the move between points button [← ]or [→ ]and select the point. (The red point ■ is theselected point.)

The red point（■）
moves (to green point)

2.Tap the "Position" button.
Move between
point

A red mark（ □ ）moves freely

2. Tap the [Remove] button. (The selected
point becomes an outlined point □ )3. Use the move between points button [← ]or [→ ]. *The point is deleted.
3. Tap the "▼▼" "▼" "▲" "▲▲" button andselect the position (mark □) you want to
add.
4. When the "Add" is tapped, the point is
added.（□）→（■）*A new point is created.

216 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Curve setting operation Spline curve
A smoother curve is made.
Setting method is same at spline and point.
Point

SplineUp to 11 or 17 points curve can be used.
(differs with function)
Initial point number: 9 points (17 points
curve), 7 points (11 points curve)*The set points can be freely increased, decreased, andoffset.

[Rate adjustment of each point]

1. Tap to theitemand select the point whose
rate you want to set.

Spline curve*The mark on the curve shows
the currently selected point.

2. Tap to the [Rate]
item. And set
the rate using
the "▼▼" "▼" "▲""▲▲" buttons
The kind of mixing curve

Repeat steps 1 through 2 and adjust the
curve.

Point curve (Point) adjustment(Point)Up to 11 or 17 points curve can beused. (differs with function)
Initial point number: 9 points (17points curve), 7 points (11 points
curve)*[Separ.] mode: Normal setting*[Comb.] mode: Creates a left and rightsymmetrical curve.

217 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Switch selection method

The various functions used in the T16IZ can be selected by switch. The switch (including when stick, trim
lever, or VR are used as a switch) setting method is common to all functions.
Switch selection
When a switch is selected at a mixing function, etc., the selection screen shown below is called.

(Switch selection screen example)

Tap the chosen
switch.

When switch is selected
Switch ON/OFF setting is possible at each position.
1. When the ON/OFF "Set" position switch istapped after the switch was selected, thescreen shown below appears.

When stick, trim lever, or VR isselected.
When a stick, trim lever, or VR is used as a switch,
the following 4 modes can be selected.

Next page

Normal or Alternate: Alternate switchingmode is available depending on mixing
function.
*When the button of each position is tapped,
it toggles between ON and OFF.
2. Tap the button and set to the ON position.
3. Close the screen by tapping [Hardware
select].

218 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Hysteresis-type and box-type can be selected in a hardware select screen.
When a stick, trim lever, or VR is used as a switch, the following 4 modes can be selected.

◆ Linear・Hysteresis mode

◆ Symmetry・Hysteresis modeThis setting method selects function ON/OFF basedon the set point. Hysteresis (dead band) can be set
to ON and OFF. The ON and OFF positions can bereversed with the Reverse button.

The operation is the same as the linear hysteresis
mode, but left and right (up and down) operations are
symmetrical about the neutral position. For example,
when you want to switch DR1 with the aileron stick,when the stick is moved to the left or right, DR1 canbe turned ON at the same left and right position.

◆ Linear・Box mode

◆ Symmetry・Box modeThis mode turns on the switch within a range of 2 points.
Each point can be set. The ON and OFF positions can bereversed with the Reverse switch.

The operation is the same as the linear box mode,
but left and right (up and down) operation issymmetrical about the neutral position.

219 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

When shifting the ON/OFF point◆ Area Green：ON◆ Area Red：OFF◆ Area Yellow：Hysteresis (Dead band)

The ON/OFF and hysteresis (dead band) boundary point (there
are 2 points: top and bottom) position can be shifted. ON/OFF ispossible at a free position.
[ Setting method ]Reverse of ON/
OFF direction

1. Move the stick, etc. tothe point you want to shift
and touch the [ON/OFF]button. The boundary
points change.
Current stick position● Symmetry[ Setting method] → Box Type

1. Move the stick to the point
you want to shift upper side.
2. Touch the [Upper] button.
The boundary points
change.
3. Move the stick to the point
you want to shift lower side.
When Upper(Lower) is set, at thesame time, Lower(Upper) is also set.

4. Touch the [Lower] button.
The boundary points
change.

Hysteresis ：Hysteresis (dead band) can be set to ON and OFF● Symmetry[Setting method] → Linear Type

1. Move the stick to the off
point you want to shift andtouch the [OFF] button. The
off points change.
2. Move the stick to the on
point you want to shift andtouch the [ON] button. The
on points change.
When Upper (Lower) isset, at the same time,
Lower (Upper) is also set.

220 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

Logic switch (Condition select and DG1, DG2)
The logic switch function lets you turn operation on and off by combining two switches. For instance, thecondition is activated when 2 switches are turned on.
Logic mode
AND: When both switches are ON, thecondition is ON.
OR: When either switch is ON, the condition
is ON.
EX-OR: When the two switches are indifferent states, the condition is ON.

Switch mode selection
1. Tap to the [Mode] "Single" item.
(Logic switch setting screen)

Switch selection
1. Select the switch A and B.
Logic mode selection
1. Tap to the [Logic] item.
2. Select the logic mode.

221 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

PC Port

The transmitter can be used as a game controller by connecting it to a computer with a USB cable. (Somegames cannot be used.)● PC PortTop
Connection method (for Windows)
1. Connect the T16IZ PC port to your PC with
the USB cable included with the set.
2. When connecting for the first time, setup
will start. After the setup is complete, it canbe used as a game controller.

*Channels 1 to 8 can be used with a USB connection.
* Operation confirmed simulator software
・RealFlight 8 (Update to the latest version)
・RealFlight 9[ RealFlight setting method ]1. Connect T16IZ to your PC and start Real
Flight.
2. Select "Settings ..." from the "Simulation"menu of RealFlight to open the "Settings"
dialog.
3. Set "Deadband Percentage (%)" of"Controller" to 0.

4. Click the [OK] button to close the "Settings"
dialog.
5. Select "Select Controller ..." from the"Simulation" menu to open the "SelectController" dialog.
6. Set "Profile" to "Futaba" and click the [Edit]
button.

222 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

7. If necessary, assign channels and makereverse settings. After setting, click the[Save As ...] button to save the profile.

8. Click the [Close] button to return to the"Select Controller" dialog.
9. Click the [Calibrate] button to calibrate.
Set the stick, switch, dial, and lever to be
used in the neutral position, and press the[Next] button.

10. Operate the stick, switch, dial, andlever fully left and right or up anddown to enter the operating range.
After confirming that the correction iscomplete, press the [Finish] button to
return to the "Select Controller" dialog.

11. Click the [OK] button in the "SelectController" dialog to close the dialog.

223 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

UpdatingYour Futaba T16IZ transmitter programming can be updated easily online. When functions
are added or improved, the update file can be downloaded from our website. Copy the
update files to the microSD card and then use the following procedure to update theprogram. Check our web site for the FAQ regarding updating for more information.

Updating procedure
Note: If the battery fully discharges during
program updating, updating will fail. Whenthe remaining battery capacity is 50% or
less, always recharge the battery before
updating.
Note: The model data in the transmitter canbe used unchanged after updating, but tobe safe, back up the model data before
updating.

5. Insert the microSD card with "FUTABA" folderthat contained the update software into the
SD card slot on your T16IZ radio transmitter.

1. Download the zip file of the update datafrom our website.

Futaba WEB

Installed microSD cardof the update file

16IZ Update Zip ﬁleDownload

6. Turn on the transmitter power while pressing
down the "HOME/EXIT" button. The update
screen appears on the LCD display of your
T16IZ and the software update is started.

2. Extract the zip file on your computer.

2

3. The "FUTABA" folder will be created on yourcomputer.
4. Copy the "FUTABA" folder into your microSD
card.

1
Press the HOME/EXIT switch and turn on

Copy the "FUTABA"
folder into your SD card.

Updating
Note: If the microSD card has already had"another FUTABA" folder before you make acopy, the "FUTABA" folder is OVERWRITTEN.

224 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

7. When the software update is completed,"Completed" message is shown on the LCD
display of your T16IZ. (Show below picture.)

Complete

8. Turn off the power switch of your T16IZ andremove the microSD card from the card slot.

Possible Problems
When one of the error messages shown
below appears on the LCD screen your
T16IZ, the software update will not becompleted.

Don't absolutely remove the battery
and the microSD card from thetransmitter during the update.
There is a possibility that the transmitter
will be damaged.
Recovering a failed update
If you failed to update for any reason, it
may transmitter will not start.
In that case, please update againtransmitter in the following procedure.
1. Detach the battery from the transmitter.
2. Insert the microSD card that contained
the update files to the transmitter.
3. Attach the battery to the transmitter
while pressing down the "HOME/EXIT"
button.
4. The update will start.
Even after the above steps, if thetransmitter fails to update or does notstart, please have it serviced.

"Low battery."

Software update is postponed becauseof low battery. Retry the software updateafter the battery is recharged.

"Update file not found."

The T16IZ cannot find the update file on
the microSD card. Check to be sure all the
update files have been copied onto themicroSD card.

"Broken file."

The T16IZ detects the update file error. The
update file may be broken or for anothertransmitter.

"Write error."The software update procedure is stopped
for an unknown reason. Contact your local
service center when this error message
appears on the LCD screen of your T16IZ.

225 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

T14SG/FX-22/T12K → T16IZ MODEL DATA CONVERSION
The model data (only latest version) of T14SG/FX-22/T12K can be copied to T16IZ.

* microSD card is required.
* The model data of T16IZ cannot be copied to T14SG/FX-22/T12K.
* Use an SD card conversion adapter (not included) to insert a microSD card into the T14SG/FX-22/T12K.

[Model data conversion method]
1. Attach a microSD card that contains model
data of T14SG/FX-22/T12K to the SD slot of a
T16IZ.
2. Turn on the power switch, and the Data
Converter should run.

3. The converter shows a list of model data inthe card. Select a model data that you wantto convert and push "CONVERT" → "Yes" key,
and the converter should begin convertingdata.
4. If the convert succeeds, the converter willshow the following message. The converted
data are copied to the internal memory of
the T16IZ. Hence, if the T16IZ does not haveavailable space in its internal memory,converts must fail.

5. The converter can accept model data
made by T14SG/FX-22/T12K with the latest
software only. If you try to convert model
data made by old version software, theconverter must fail to convert and show
the following error message. If this message
is shown, do the following procedure to
update the model data in order to avoid
this limitation.

(a) First, update a T14SG/FX-22/T12K to the latest software.
(b) Load the model data which failed to convert into the
T14SG/FX-22/T12K with the latest software, and themodel data should be updated to the latest format.
(c) Save the updated model data to a microSD card.
(d) Retry to convert the updated model data on a T16IZ.
* When microSD card cannot be recognized, it may be able
to be used if it reformats by SD formatter offered from SD
Association.
SD formatter is downloadable from SD Association
https://www.sdcard.org/

CAUTION
After finishing data copy, be sure to
perform a complete check of operation
with the model to be used.
Check well all the directions of operation
and all the operation switches.

226 →GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS

This product uses the following open source software.
■ Google Noto Fonts
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/
OFL----------------------------------------------------------SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007----------------------------------------------------------PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide development of collaborative font projects, to support the font creation efforts of academic
and linguistic communities, and to provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in partnership with others. The OFL allows
the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including any derivative works,
can be bundled, embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved names are not used by derivative works. The fonts andderivatives, however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document
created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS"Font Software" refers to the set of files released by the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may include source files, build
scripts and documentation. "Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement(s). "Original Version" refers to thecollection of Font Software components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s). "Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to, deleting, or
substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed, modify, redistribute, andsell modified and unmodified copies of the Font Software, subject to the following conditions:1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled, redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy contains the above
copyright notice and this license. These can be included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or in the appropriate machine-readable
metadata fields within text or binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the corresponding CopyrightHolder. This restriction only applies to the primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any Modified Version, except
to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written permission.
5) The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole, must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be distributed under any otherlicense. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the Font Software.
TERMINATIONThis license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONTSOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

FUTABA CORPORATION
Hobby Radio Control Business Center Sales & Marketing Department
1080 Yabutsuka, Chosei-mura, Chosei-gun, Chiba-ken, 299-4395, Japan
TEL: +81-475-32-6051, FAX: +81-475-32-2915©FUTABA CORPORATION

227 →2020, 11 (1)GO to TABLE OF CONTENTS